Fax Server Administration Guide

Administration and Installation
Guide
Version 5
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
License Agreement
This End User License Agreement (“Agreement”) is
between you and One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.for
the Program defined below.
TargetFax version 5
Document Number VZSI-081503-511U
Copyright
Version February 2009
Copyright ©1995-2009 One Touch Global
Technologies, Inc. +1-800-233-3619, +1949-270-0300. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system, or translated into any language in any
form by any means, electronic or mechanical,
without the written permission of One Touch
Global Technologies, Inc.
Printed in the United States of America
YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF
THIS AGREEMENT UPON EXECUTION OF THIS
AGREEMENT BY YOU, OR BY INSTALLING,
COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING THE PROGRAM.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS
LICENSE, DO NOT SIGN THIS AGREEMENT OR
INSTALL, COPY OR USE THE PROGRAM.
Trademarks. The TargetFax logo design and name are
registered trademarks held by One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. Other brand names, com¬pany names, and
product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies. These trademarks may
include products such as Microsoft® Word®, Microsoft®
Publisher®, ‘Explorer’ (used to describe a well-known
interface meta¬phor in Microsoft products), operating
systems such as Microsoft Windows 95®, Windows 98®,
Windows XP®, Windows NT®, Windows 2000, Windows 2003, Microsoft Vista, and fax server products such
as OpenText Fax Server, RightFax, Brooktrout, Dialogic,
and others.
License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
Agreement, One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. grants
to Licensee a non-exclusive, nontransferable license to
use the TargetFax program and all of its components
("Program") for Licensee’s own use. This use is restricted
to a single CPU (or in the case of multiple users or
resources, the number of CPU’s, resources, and/or users
licensed), the resource restriction including the number of
fax resources (fax servers, and/or fax lines), application
modules or connectors licensed, at Licensee’s principal
business address, or other location approved by One
Touch Global Technologies, Inc. Additional separate
license agreements are required for service bureau operation, the TargetFax API and any other technology.
Although multiple components may be included on software media or referenced in the documentation, usage is
limited only to those components or resources licensed
and paid for. Once a permanent license key is issued,
refunds are not allowed.
Service and Maintenance. Service support and maintenance of the Program are not covered by this Agreement.
Separate support and maintenance agreements are offered
by One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
Restrictions on Use. Licensee will not reverse engineer,
de-compile, or disassemble the Program; resell, rent, or
impose a charge for using the Program; or loan or transfer
it to any other party, without One Touch Global Technol-
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
II
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
ogies Inc.’s written consent. This Program and documentation are provided on a non-disclosure basis, and
therefore, may not be used by individuals or compa¬nies
for purposes of reviewing the product or technology to
develop new products, or improve an existing product
competitive in nature to the Program.
Confidentiality. Licensee acknowledges that the Program contains valuable proprietary information and trade
secrets, including, but not limited to technical information, program code and specifications (“Confidential
Information”). Licensee shall maintain the secrecy of the
Confidential Information and not disclose such information to any third party other than authorized employees of
Licensee without the written consent of One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
Failure to timely pay License fees. In addition to any
other rights that One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
may have under this Agreement, if Licensee fails to
timely pay any fee required of it hereunder, One Touch
Global Technologies, Inc. may immediately suspend any
obligation it may have to Licensee under this Agreement
or any other agreement it may have with Licensee and
may charge Licensee a late payment penalty of 1½% per
month on all past due amounts.
Copies. Licensee will not copy the Program, except for
backup purposes. Any backup copies will include One
Touch Global Tech¬nologies Inc.’s proprietary rights and
copyright notices. Licensee will not copy the User Guide,
Reference Guide, or any other doc¬umentation. Additional copies of this manual are available from One Touch
Global Technologies, Inc. as listed on its price list, for
Licensee’s own use. Product installations as backup,
redundant, test or development services require the purchase of separate licenses.
Ownership. One Touch Global Technologies Inc. retains
all copyrights and other intellectual property rights in the
Program and all documentation, and is subject only to the
limited license granted by this Agreement.
Disclaimer. IN NO EVENT WILL ONE TOUCH GLOBAL TECHNOLOGIES, INC. OR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES OR INDIVIDUALS BE LIABLE IN
ANY WAY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, HOWEVER
CAUSED, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
WARRANTY, CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY, PRODUCT
RELIABILITY OR FUNCTIONALITY, LOST PROF-
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
ITS, LOST SAVINGS, USE OR LACK OF USE OF
PROGRAM, OR OTHERWISE. THIS IS AN ABSOLUTE CONDITION OF PRODUCT USE AND
LICENSING.
Infringement. One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. will
defend any claim that the Program infringes any U.S.
patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right of
any third party as it relates to Licensee, provided that One
Touch Global Technologies Inc. is given reasonable
notice of such claim, is allowed to control the defense and
settlement of the claim, and Licensee cooperates fully in
the defense of the claim. This constitutes One Touch Global Technologies Inc.’s sole obligation with respect to
any claim of intellectual property infringement with
respect to Licensee. One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
shall have no liability for any infringement claim based
on Licensee’s (1) use of the Program in a manner exceeding the scope of rights granted to Licensee under this
Agreement; (2) use of the Program in any manner inconsistent with the terms and conditions of this Agreement;
(3) use of the Program after One Touch Technologies,
Inc.’s written notice that Licensee should cease use of the
Program due an infringement claim; (4) combination of
the Program with a non-One Touch Global Technologies,
Inc.’s program or data if such infringement claim would
have been avoided had such combination had not
occurred; (5) use of the Program outside of the geographical boundaries of the United States (including Puerto
Rico); or (6) use of other than the latest version of the
Program, if such infringement could have been avoided
by use the latest version and such latest version had been
reasonably available to Licensee.
Updates. One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. may,
from time to time, create updated versions of the Program. One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. may, at its
sole option, make any update available to Licensee upon
payment of Licensee of fees established for such updates.
All provisions of this Agreement shall apply to Licensee’s use of such updates.
Termination. One Touch Global Technologies Inc.
reserves the right to terminate this Agreement without
notice upon default or breach of this Agreement. In the
event of termi¬nation, Licensee will return all copies of
the Program, user manuals and any other documentation
to One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. Under no circumstances is One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. obligated, nor will it provide, a refund of any license fees
under these conditions.
Transfer. This Agreement may be transferred or assigned
to a third party only with One Touch Global Technologies
Inc.’s prior written consent, provided that the third party
agrees to all of the terms of this Agreement and that Lic-
III
ensee does not retain any copies of the Program after the
transfer. Any attempt to make an assignment or transfer
without the written consent of One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. shall be an event of default under this
Agreement and any assignment or transfer shall be null
and void.
Disputes. This Agreement will be governed by the laws
of the United States, State of California, and any action
brought hereunder shall be brought in state or federal
courts located in the County of Orange, California.
Attorney’s Fees. If either party files any action or brings
any proceeding against the other party arising out of this
Agreement, then as between them, the prevailing party
shall be entitled to recover, as an element of the cost of
suit and not its damages, reasonable attorneys fees and
costs to be fixed by the court.
Licensee Responsibility. Licensee agrees to be familiar
and fully understand the TCPA and US Code, Title 47,
and any other laws in regards to unsolicited electronic
transmissions. One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
declines any responsibility whatsoever regarding Licensees’ or dealers’ usage of any products it provides, and it is
solely up to the licensee to determine proper and legal
use.
Warranty
(a) One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. warrants that for
90 days from delivery, the Program will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on a compatible computer in a satisfactory network environment,
and that the Program will perform substantially in accordance with its documentation, applicable to the components licensed. One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. does
not warrant that the Program will operate uninterrupted or
error free.
(b) The preceding warranty will not apply if: (i) the Program is not used in accordance with the documentation
related to the Program; (ii) the Program or any part
thereof has been modified without the prior written consent of One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. or (iii) a
defect in the software has been caused by Licensee's malfunctioning equipment or third party software.
LING THE FEE(S) PAID FOR THE PROGRAM,
WHERE SUCH REFUND IS FULLY DEPRECIATED
INCREMENTALLY OVER A ONE YEAR PERIOD
FROM THE DAY FOLLOWING THE EXPIRATION
OF THE WARRANTY PERIOD. ONE TOUCH GLOBAL TECHNOLOGIES, INC., FOR ITSELF AND ITS
SUPPLIERS, DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND EXCEPT AS STATED HEREIN, IS PROVIDED
‘AS IS’.
Notices. Any notice required or permitted by or in connection with this Agreement shall be in writing and shall
be made by facsimile, by hand delivery, by Federal
Express or other similar overnight delivery service (designated for overnight delivery), or by certified mail, first
class postage prepaid, return receipt requested, addressed
to the principal business address of One Touch Global
Technologies, Inc. in the care of One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. or in the case of Licensee, to the address
given to One Touch Global Technologies as to where the
Program is to be shipped or the address registered at the
time the license is acquired; or to such other address as
may be hereafter specified by written notice by one of the
respective parties to the other. Notice shall be considered
given (i) as of the date of facsimile transmission (provided it is sent prior to 5:00 PM local time to the recipient
on a Business Day (or if not sent by such time, then it
shall be deemed given on the next Business Day) and the
sender receives written confirmation of transmission), or
(ii) the date of hand delivery, or (iii) upon receipt if sent
by certified mail, or (iv) one (1) Business Day after delivery to Federal Express or similar overnight delivery service, independent of the date of actual delivery, provided
the giver of such notice can establish the fact that notice
was given as provided herein. If notice is tendered pursuant to the provisions of this paragraph and is refused by
the intended recipient thereof, the notice, nevertheless,
shall be considered to have been given and shall be effective as of the date herein provided.
(c) ANY LIABILITY OF ONE TOUCH GLOBAL
TECHNOLOGIES, INC. AND ITS SUPPLIERS WITH
RESPECT TO ANY SOFTWARE OR THE PERFORMANCE THEREOF UNDER ANY THEORY WILL BE
LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OR, IF SUCH REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, IN
THE SOLE OPINION OF ONE TOUCH GLOBAL
TECHNOLOGIES, INC., IS IMPRACTICAL, TO A
MAXIMUM REFUND AND/OR LIABILITY EQUAL-
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
IV
Welcome to TargetFax
About TargetFax
TargetFax is the result of twelve years of developing a mission-critical application
for desktop faxing, fax broadcasting, document imaging and document WorkFlow. It provides the key elements of fax server technology, database management, and integrated interfaces to document management systems and custom
applications. It is designed to help create the paperless environment.
TargetFax for RightFax
The TargetFax Client, Broadcast Manager, Mailmerge and Workflow components
seamlessly integrate with the RightFax product line from Captaris. TargetFax
enhances the RightFax product line in a number of ways. For more information
please contact your TargetFax Sales representative at esales@targetfax.com. Integration instructions for TargetFax and RightFax begin in “Chapter - 12 TargetFax
for RightFax" on page 267.
One Touch Global Technologies
With over fifteen years in the e-document delivery industry, our core strength is
providing eDocument Automation Solutions that scan, broadcast, and capture
faxes and scanned images to enterprise WorkFlow. We have implemented custom
systems that automate B2B e-document delivery, image processing, retrieval/
storage and integrate database applications with fax technology.
One Touch Global Technologies Sales
Please call One Touch Global to locate an authorized dealer for product sales and
service.
U.S. Product Sales: (800) 233-3619 (949) 270-0301 Fax: (949) 270-0290
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fax Server Software and Hardware
Document Imaging and Scanning Products
Document Output Management Solutions
Engineering / Integration Projects
Data Collections Systems
Complete Automated Systems for Electronic Documents
TargetFax Broadcasting
WorkFlow Automation
Technical Support
Technical support is available to authorized users with valid support contracts.
You may contact One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. in the following ways:
• Phone: (949) 270-0304
• Fax: (949) 270-0290
• e-mail: esupport@targetfax.com
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
v
Note: One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. offers technical support for software,
fax boards and fax servers to customers and dealers with current support contracts
for these products. Basic computer knowledge is required to operate any software.
TargetFax support does not include assistance with computer usage, and network
setup, configuration and administration. Please refer administrative and computer
use questions to your local administrator or computer professional.
Documentation
Your TargetFax distribution CD contains a PDF version of this manual, and the
TargetFax 5 User Guide and the TargetFax Administration and Installation
Guide. These manuals represent our desire to provide our customers with the
means to conveniently take full advantage of this fine software. We are interested
in your comments concerning the accuracy, completeness, clarity and relevance of
our documents. Please contact us at documentation@TargetFax.com with your
concerns, questions and suggestions.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
vi
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
How to Use this Manual to Install TargetFax
Begin by reviewing the TargetFax system requirements on page 23 of “Chapter 1 Introduction to TargetFax.”
After you have prepared the Server, read those sections of “Chapter - 3 Fax Board
Preparation and Installation" on page 47 that apply to your installation. This will
help you to install your fax board(s) and order your telephone service.
Your next step is follow the instructions in “Chapter - 4 Installing TargetFax Software to the Server" on page 71.
At the end of the installation you are prompted to license TargetFax as explained
in “Chapter - 2 TargetFax System Administration" on page 23.
Next, follow the instructions in “Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services" on page 79, to add the TargetFax Services and configure the fax board.
After you confirm that TargetFax is functioning properly, you can follow the
instructions in “" on page 125, to give users access to TargetFax at their workstations of through Terminal Services.
The next step is to install/Import and licence any additional components you may
have, such as the BarCode component (see “Import the BarCode Component" on
page 200).
If you dial a number to get an outside line before dialing the fax number, or if you
include area codes before local phone numbers see “DialingPlans:" on page 33 of
the TargetFax User Guide before sending a test fax.
Trouble Shooting
The document TargetFax FAQs is included on your TargetFax distribution CD.
You can easily search this PDF file for TargetFax error messages you see, or for a
description of your problem. Do not attempt to uninstall TargetFax unless you follow the instructions in “Chapter - 14 Upgrading TargetFax,” of the TargetFax
Administration and Installation Guide.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
vii
Summary of TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Chapter - 1 Introduction to TargetFax
Description of the TargetFax suite of modules
Chapter - 2 System Administration
This chapter begins by explaining how to use the System Administrator menus
and toolbars. It then provides procedures for adding the users to whom user rights
are assigned.
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
This chapter explains how to configure fax boards, order phone service, and disable Windows drivers during board installation.
Chapter - 4 Installing TargetFax Software to the Server
This chapter provides procedures for installing the TargetFax Server software and
Client modules on the TargetFax Server.
Chapter - 5 Installing the TargetFax Client Modules Separately
from the Server
Instructions for installing the TargetFax Client, Broadcast Manager, and System
Administrator on a workstation
Chapter - 6 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
This chapter explains how to add and start the The TargetFax Workserver. It then
covers how to add and configure services for the Dialogic BrookTrout and Dialogic Diva fax boards.
Chapter - 7 TargetFax for WorkFlow
TargetFax workflow directs received faxes to the printers, e-mail addresses, and
disk directories specified for TargetFax users.Workflow can also be set to automatically send PDF and TIFF files, saved to a specified directory, as faxes.
Chapter - 8 TargetFax FTP Connector
The TargetFax FTP Connector provides two ways to share data by sending it to
FTP Servers: with the Upload/Download feature you can send data to a FTP
server such as Image Silo. You can also use TargetFax FTP Gateways to send
faxes between TargetFax sites. This lets you share expensive resources, such as
high-speed fax boards.
Chapter - 9 TargetFax Barcode Connector
This chapter explains how to install the barcode connector, and use it to process
received faxes based on scanned barcode information in the faxes.
Chapter -10 TargetFax Image PRO Component
This chapter explains how to set the Image PRO component up to repair and reorient received faxes.
Chapter -11 Database Maintenance
This chapter explains how to repair, compact and update TargetFax databases, as
well as convert your data bases to SQL and import SQL data. The names and locations of key database, ini and log files are also provided.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
viii
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Chapter - 12 TargetFax for RightFax
This chapter includes procedures for installing and configuring the TargetFax
Connector for RightFax.
Chapter - 13 TargetFax for Cardiff TELEform
This chapter includes procedures for installing and configuring the TargetFax
Connector for Cardiff TELEform
Chapter - 14 Trouble Shooting
Fax event error messages and FAQs
Chapter - 15 Upgrading TargetFax
This chapter provides procedures for build and version upgrades of the TargetFax
Server and Client modules.
Chapter - 16 The Billing Module
Using the Billing module, you can track the costs of, or amounts to bill for services. The Broadcast Manager Billing feature tracks the costs of faxes sent in
broadcast jobs. The billing rates feature for Workflow calculates costs for faxes, email or files sent or received by the users you associate with these events. Billing
reports summarize the costs charged to each user or job.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
ix
Message from the President
Congratulations on choosing TargetFax. You now have at your fingertips an exceptional tool for
automating and managing targeted fax document delivery. This is a task that traditionally required
tremendous manual labor, and now you can perform this same task on a regular basis quickly, reliably, and with better quality, all in a matter of minutes of set up time.
TargetFax truly complements the One Touch Global vision. Simply stated, our strategy is to automate critical and repetitive processes with a maximum and measurable return on investment. Very
rarely is an IT project justifiable without tangible gains in productivity, profitability, cost reduction, asset protection or compliance milestones. With TargetFax, productivity gains are huge, and
the return on investment is frequently staggering. We invite you to achieve the greatest value possible with TargetFax by accomplishing far more than you could without this technology.
One Touch Global believes you should focus on your business, and not the business of information
technology. TargetFax is only one of several products provided by One Touch Global that focuses
on our overall vision of giving you the most value for your IT dollar. Value from technology is
achieved by leveraging your existing IT investments. Reliable technology maximizes performance. Your technology choices must complement your most specific business requirements.
With TargetFax, One Touch Global looks forward to helping you provide a complete solution in
the areas of electronic document delivery, storage, retrieval, WorkFlow and management. We
thank you for your patronage and trust.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
x
Table of Contents
How to Use this Manual to Install TargetFax........................................................... 7
Chapter - 1 Introduction to TargetFax ...................................................................... 19
TargetFax Suite Modules ........................................................................................ 20
Minimum System Requirements ............................................................................ 23
TargetFax Server ................................................................................................. 23
TargetFax Workstation Modules ......................................................................... 23
Chapter - 2 TargetFax System Administration ........................................................ 23
Licensing Manager ................................................................................................. 24
System Administrator Main Menu ......................................................................... 26
File menu ............................................................................................................. 26
The View Menu ................................................................................................... 27
The Tools Menu .................................................................................................. 27
System Administrator Toolbar ............................................................................ 28
User Administration ................................................................................................ 30
Set Default Receiver ............................................................................................ 30
Importing Users ................................................................................................... 31
Set the Default Sender ......................................................................................... 33
Set User Rights .................................................................................................... 33
User Groups ......................................................................................................... 35
Group Access to Faxes ........................................................................................ 36
View Users Events .............................................................................................. 36
Events Filters....................................................................................................... 37
Events Toolbar .................................................................................................... 39
User Assistance Tools ............................................................................................. 41
Data Sources ........................................................................................................ 41
Topics .................................................................................................................. 41
Library Doc ......................................................................................................... 41
Overlays .............................................................................................................. 41
System Defaults for Notifications .......................................................................... 42
Users Class Notifications .................................................................................... 42
WorkServer Alerts ............................................................................................... 42
Barcode Alerts ..................................................................................................... 43
WorkServer Inbound Routing Defaults .................................................................. 44
Multi-Server Performance Tuning .......................................................................... 45
Multi-WorkServer Setup ..................................................................................... 45
Multi-FaxServer Setup ........................................................................................ 45
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation ............................................... 47
Dialogic BrookTrout Fax Boards ........................................................................... 48
Dialogic BrookTrout Fax Board Preparation ......................................................... 51
TR114 (PCI) Digital T1 Fax Boards ................................................................... 51
T1 Provisioning ...................................................................................................... 55
Connect to the T1 Telephone Service ................................................................. 56
Installing Additional Boards ................................................................................... 57
Installing Fax Boards on Two Computers .............................................................. 58
xi
Ordering DID Telephone Service ........................................................................... 59
Analog DID ......................................................................................................... 59
Other Information ................................................................................................ 61
Disabling Dialogic BrookTrout Windows Device Drivers .................................. 62
Dialogic Diva Fax Boards ...................................................................................... 64
Dialogic Diva Board Support .............................................................................. 68
Dialogic Diva Voice and Fax Features ................................................................ 69
Ordering an ISDN PRI Line for Your Diva Server T1/PRI Adapter .................. 69
Information to Obtain when You Order Phone Lines ......................................... 69
Chapter - 4 Installing TargetFax Software to the Server ........................................ 71
Installing TargetFax Software ................................................................................ 73
Installing Resources/Applications ....................................................................... 77
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services ............................................. 79
Licensing Manager ................................................................................................. 80
Add the WorkServer Service .................................................................................. 81
Start the WorkServer Service .............................................................................. 82
Configuring Board Services .................................................................................. 83
Configuring the Brooktrout TruFax 100/200 ...................................................... 84
Configuring the Brooktrout 1034 Digital T1 ....................................................... 87
Configuring the Brooktrout TR1034 Digital E1 ................................................. 92
Configuring the Brooktrout 1034 Analog ........................................................... 96
Configuring the Brooktrout TR114 Analog ...................................................... 100
Configuring the Brooktrout TR114 Digital T1 .................................................104
Set up the Netaccess Card ................................................................................. 108
Configuring the Netaccess Card ........................................................................ 110
Installing Additional Boards .............................................................................. 111
Configuring Dialogic Diva Boards .................................................................... 113
Channel Settings ................................................................................................ 116
Configuring AFR (Automatic Fax Removal) ....................................................... 118
Installing a Fax Board for TargetFax AFR ........................................................ 118
Windows 2003 Installation of TR114 Series Boards and TargetFax AFR ....... 119
Inbound Routing to AFR ...................................................................................... 120
Routing from Analog Boards to AFR ............................................................... 120
Digital Routing to AFR .....................................................................................120
Board Service Field Descriptions ......................................................................... 122
Server Setup Tab ............................................................................................... 122
Board/ChannelSetUp Tab .................................................................................. 123
Chapter - 6 Installing the Applications to Workstations and Terminal Server .. 125
Install the Client, Broadcast Manager, Mail Merge and System Administrator .. 127
Window 2003 Installations ................................................................................ 127
Installing the TargetFax Client for Terminal Services ...................................... 127
Installing the Client Applications on a Workstation ........................................130
Chapter - 7 TargetFax for WorkFlow ..................................................................... 135
Default Inbound Workflow ................................................................................... 136
Default Routing Instructions ............................................................................. 136
xii
Setup Default Inbound Routing to a Printer ...................................................... 136
Set Up Default Inbound Routing to a Directory ................................................ 138
File and Directory Naming Parameters ............................................................. 144
Default Inbound Routing to an E-mail Address ................................................ 145
Barcode/ImagingProcessing Splitting .................................................................. 148
More Inbound Routing Options ............................................................................ 149
Overlay File Name on Image ............................................................................149
Forward to Other User(s): ................................................................................. 149
Copy to Document Management System ..........................................................149
Forward to User’s FaxTo ................................................................................... 150
FaxServer Service Configuration for Inbound Routing ........................................ 151
DID/DNIS Routing ............................................................................................ 153
Channel Routing ................................................................................................ 155
DTMF Routing .................................................................................................. 155
CSID Routing .................................................................................................... 157
PDF to TIFF Conversion ...................................................................................... 159
Import the PDF2TIF Component ...................................................................... 159
Install the Clear Image Run Time ..................................................................... 160
Default PDF2TIF Settings ................................................................................. 160
Sending Files Saved to a Directory ...................................................................... 162
How the ENDSEND Rule Works ...................................................................... 162
Building a DCF File .......................................................................................... 163
Installing and Using the XML Component .......................................................... 168
Importing and Licensing the TargetFax XML Component ...............................168
Configuring the XML Component .................................................................... 168
The XML(GetData) Function Parameters ......................................................... 170
Default Sender and Receiver ............................................................................172
The TargetFax Mail Connector ............................................................................ 172
Add the MailServer Service for the Mail Connector ......................................... 172
Install the Service .............................................................................................. 172
Apply the License key for the TargetFax Mail Connector ................................ 173
Configure the MailServer Service ..................................................................... 174
Receiving e-mail ................................................................................................ 175
Separating Documents within Fax Transmissions ................................................ 177
Outbound Completion Actions ............................................................................. 178
Chapter - 8 TargetFax FTP Connector ................................................................... 181
The FTP Connector ............................................................................................... 182
Importing and Licensing the TargetFax FTP Connector ................................... 182
Adding an FTPServer Upload Service .............................................................. 183
Specify Project Directories ................................................................................ 186
The TargetFax FTPServer Gateway Service ........................................................ 188
Forwarding Received Faxes from one TargetFax Site to Another Via FTP ..... 188
Using a Remote Fax Board Server to Send Faxes ............................................. 194
Monitoring the Progress of a Remote Event ..................................................... 197
Chapter - 9 The TargetFax BarCode Component .................................................. 199
BarCode Component Installation and Configuration ........................................... 200
Import the BarCode Component ....................................................................... 200
xiii
Install the Clear Image Run Time ..................................................................... 201
BarCode Generation Installation ....................................................................... 201
Bar Code Fonts Installation and Setup .............................................................. 201
Setup ..................................................................................................................... 204
Symbologies ...................................................................................................... 204
The BARCODE Component Main Screen ........................................................... 205
Lookup Values ................................................................................................... 205
Document Profiles ............................................................................................ 205
Default Document Profile .................................................................................. 206
Document Profiles ............................................................................................... 209
Document Profile Options ................................................................................. 211
Individual Document Profiles ............................................................................... 217
MISSING ........................................................................................................... 217
ROUTETO ........................................................................................................ 218
Routing and Splitting Bar Coded Faxes ............................................................... 220
Test the Routing Options ................................................................................... 222
Receive Faxes with a Custom Document Profile ................................................ 226
Advanced BarCode Options ................................................................................. 228
Set Up a Document Profile to Do Bar Code Lookups ....................................... 228
Create a BarCode Form .....................................................................................231
Test the BarCode Form .....................................................................................233
Sending a Notification when No BarCodes are Detected ..................................... 235
Working with the Custom/Routing Rules ......................................................... 238
Reading‘Bar Codes that Contain Multiple Fields ................................................. 240
Chapter - 10 The Image PRO Component .............................................................. 241
Image Pro Component Installation ....................................................................... 242
Import the Image Pro Component ..................................................................... 242
Install the Clear Image Run Time ..................................................................... 243
Document Profiles ............................................................................................... 244
Image Processing Options .................................................................................... 247
Chapter - 11 Database Maintenance ........................................................................ 249
Database Maintenance and File Backups ............................................................ 250
Database and File Backups ................................................................................ 251
Log Files and INI Files ...................................................................................... 251
Import/Export .................................................................................................... 252
Import/Export Projects ...................................................................................... 254
Fax Server Maintenance .................................................................................... 254
Installing and Using the SQL Server Components ............................................... 255
Installing a new TargetFax System ...................................................................255
Updating an Installed TargetFax System ..........................................................255
License the SQL Server Connection ................................................................. 255
Download and Install the Microsoft SQL Express and Studio .......................... 256
Select Services and Connection Types .............................................................. 257
Set Up the SQL Server Connection ...................................................................... 258
Creating the TargetFax SQL Server Databases .................................................259
Export Access Data to SQL ............................................................................... 260
Selecting the new TargetFax SQL Databases ................................................... 261
xiv
Creating SQL Server DataSources for Imports and Lookups .............................. 263
Preconnection to a Specific Database ................................................................ 264
Deleting Sent and Received Faxes ....................................................................... 266
Chapter - 12 TargetFax for RightFax ...................................................................... 267
Installing TargetFax for RightFax ........................................................................ 268
Add the TargetFax Connector for RightFax ...................................................... 268
Install the FaxServer Service for RightFax ....................................................... 268
License Manager ............................................................................................... 270
Start the RightFax FaxServer Service ............................................................... 271
Configure the TargetFax Client and Broadcast Manager for RightFax ............ 271
Configure RightFax User Mailbox Polling ....................................................... 271
Chapter - 13 TargetFax for Cardiff TELEform .................................................... 273
Installation and Configuration .............................................................................. 274
Import the TargetFax TELEform Connector ..................................................... 274
License the TargetFax Connector for TELEform ............................................. 275
Packaging .......................................................................................................... 276
Queue Rules ....................................................................................................... 276
Set up the TELEform Auto Export Database .................................................... 278
Packaging Priority ............................................................................................ 279
Package transaction files ................................................................................... 282
Mapping Additional Supplementary Fields ....................................................... 282
Setting up Package Routing Priorities .................................................................. 284
Creating the TargetFax Sample Records ........................................................... 284
Add a Test Recipient ......................................................................................... 286
Setup a User Account ........................................................................................ 286
Importing the TargetFax Sample Records ......................................................... 288
Testing the Export and Package Routing ..........................................................289
Chapter - 14 Upgrading TargetFax ......................................................................... 293
Upgrading TargetFax ............................................................................................ 294
Uninstalling the Server Software, Broadcast Manager, Print Driver and Client .. 294
Overview ........................................................................................................... 294
Back Up Databases and Image Files ................................................................. 294
Export DoNotSend List .....................................................................................295
Stop All Services ............................................................................................... 296
Remove the TargetFax Tray Icon ...................................................................... 296
Remove the Fax Boards and Fax Board Services ............................................. 296
Remove WorkServer and MailServer Services .................................................296
Uninstall the TargetFax Fax Printer .................................................................. 297
Uninstall the TargetFax Client .......................................................................... 298
Uninstall the TargetFax Server .......................................................................... 299
Uninstalling Netaccess Drivers ............................................................................. 302
Upgrading the TargetFax Server and Client ......................................................... 303
Prepare the System for Upgrade ........................................................................ 303
Upgrade the Server ............................................................................................ 303
Upgrade the Client on a WorkStation ............................................................... 305
Upgrade the WorkServer Service Rules and Configuration .............................. 305
xv
Reinstall Services .................................................................................................. 305
Uninstall the TargetFax Client .............................................................................. 307
Chapter - 15 TargetFax Billing Module .................................................................. 309
Licensing the TargetFax Billing Module .............................................................. 310
Costing Broadcast Manager Jobs .......................................................................... 311
Broadcast Manager Billing Defaults ................................................................. 312
Costing Workflow Events ..................................................................................... 313
Edit Billing Rates .............................................................................................. 313
Billing Mode Considerations ............................................................................. 314
Printing Billing Reports .....................................................................................314
Using the Billing Module with a TargetFax FTP Upload and Download Service 316
Using the Billing Module with a TargetFax FTP Gateway Service ..................... 318
xvi
Chapter - 1 Introduction to TargetFax
The TargetFax suite of products enables you to quickly and easily satisfy the fax transmission and receipt requirements of your business. A
brief list of TargetFax features includes:
• Sending single, or large broadcasts of faxes
• Receiving and delivering faxes to printers, directories, e-mail
(using SMTP), and user databases
• Performing Mail Merge faxing from report writers and word
processors
• Delivering faxes into WorkFlow, forms processing, document
imaging systems, e-mail and FTP transmission and document
management systems
• Routing faxes based on the bar coded information in the faxes
• Send faxes to an FTP server or use TargetFax FTP Gateways to
send faxes and other files between TargetFax sites
• Create billing reports for broadcasts or FTP transfer services
• Repair and reorientation of received faxes
• Automatic conversion of Adobe PDF documents to faxable
TIFF format
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
TargetFax Suite Modules
TargetFax modules are sold separately. You may have only purchased some of
these modules.
TargetFax Base Modules
These products are included in all TargetFax purchases.
TheTargetFax Server
TheTargetFax Server License supports Windows
NT®/2000®/2003® servers and NT®/2000®/XP
Pro*/Vista® workstations. It includes the TargetFax Client and System Manager modules, and supports the number of channels purchased. Features
include single or multi-page fax broadcasts, Basic
Inbound Routing, and intelligent fax board support.
TargetFax Client
The TargetFax Client sends faxes from Windows
applications using the following feature set: priority sending, date/time scheduling, fax status history, Custom Address Book support (MS Excel,
MS Access, CSV, text), custom signature, and custom cover pages.
TargetFax Mail
Connector
The TargetFax Mail Connector delivers inbound
faxes from fax boards, faxes extracted from RightFax and notifications to e-mail addresses through
SMTP. Note: The TargetFax Mail Connector is not
an SMTP Mail Server. It is a mail gateway that
connects to an existing mail server with SMTP, to
send e-mail messages.
TargetFax Add-on Modules
TargetFax Broadcast
Manager
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
The TargetFax Broadcast Manager sorts and filters
multiple fax broadcasts simultaneously, manages
database lists, and analyzes transmission costs.
Other features include: customized reporting,
merge/purge, priority sending, date/time scheduling, fax status history, Custom Address Book support (MS Excel, MS Access, CSV, text), Fax
Server Monitoring, Global Do Not Send List, customized fax header and footer.
20
C h a p t e r - 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n t o Ta r g e t F a x
TargetFax Merge Module
The TargetFax Merge module includes Mail
Merge to fax features, as well as forms and database field overlay capabilities. The Mail Merge
processor supports report writers and word processors for broadcasting formatted, individualized
documents by inserting variable database fields
and images directly in those documents. Licensed
per server.
Automatic Fax Removal
This feature enables fax recipients to phone into
the TargetFax Server. They are then instructed to
add phone numbers to the DoNotSend database.
Automatic Fax Removal is an optional feature of
servers with Dialogic BrookTrout TR1034, TR114
and Dialogic Diva fax boards. Licensed per server.
TargetFax Router
The TargetFax Router facilitates the rapid and
error-free distribution of images received from
fax, scanners and MFP devices. Quickly identify
documents received by users or sent to general
delivery. Then select, verify, index and route all or
parts of documents.
TargetFax WorkFlow
Module
The TargetFax WorkFlow module routes inbound
faxes to network directories, printers, e-mail and
image processing systems. Licensed per server
TargetFax BarCode Component
The BarCode Component interprets D1, D2, and
PDF 417 bar codes in received faxes. It uses this
information (e.g. sender’s name, account number,
etc.) to determine how documents are processed.
Bar codes also serve as package separators that
divide a fax transmission into multiple documents.
TargetFax FTP Connector
Sends faxes to FTP Sites, such as Digitech’s Image
Silo. Also lets you share fax boards by transmitting faxes between TargetFax Sites via FTP.
TargetFax Imagepro
Repairs and reorients fax images
TargetFax PDF2TIF
Converts Adobe PDF documents to faxable TIFF
format
Third Party Connectors
TargetFax for TELEform
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
Incoming faxes can be routed directly to TELEform, along with additional profiling information
for automated evaluation and processing.
21
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
TargetFax for RightFax
TargetFax for RightFax sends and receives faxes
by connecting to a RightFax server and using the
fax boards on that server.
TargetFax Broadcast 4line Module for RightFax
The TargetFax Broadcast 4-line module for RightFax requires the TargetFax for RightFax connector, and is licensed by the throughput volume of
four RightFax channels. You may license additional port modules. Supports any number of
RightFax servers. TargetFax Server module components are included in the license.
HP Digital Sender
Using the Connector for the HP Digital Sender,
you can fax documents scanned to disk by the Digital Sender. The Connector uses the information
provided by the Digital Sender to fax documents
to one or more recipients using the specified
sender Account.
XML Component
The TargetFax XML Component provides the
ability to perform a variety of functions with XML
files. XML files can be created that include information about associated image files. Images can
also be embedded into these XML files.
Connector for MFPs
Using the TargetFax Connector for MFPs (multifunction peripheral) you can fax documents that
were scanned to disk or sent to e-mail addresses by
many of the MFP products on the market today.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
22
C h a p t e r - 1 I n t r o d u c t i o n t o Ta r g e t F a x
Minimum System Requirements
TargetFax Server
•
•
•
•
IBM-compatible, PCI-bus, server-class, Pentium 5 or later
2 (GHz) Pentium Processor
1 GB RAM
24 GB of usable disk space (NTFS).
Warning: TargetFax saves all data to the directory where it is installed. By
default TargetFax installs to sub-directories of C:\Targetfax. If you prefer
not to save data to drive C: override the installation default and install to
another drive. If you copy the TargetFax directory to another drive the software will not start.
• Minimum Resolution 1024x768
• Operating System: Microsoft Windows 2000® Server/Workstation, Windows 2003® Server
• TCP/IP Network Connectivity
• CD-ROM drive
• Keyboard/Video/Mouse or Shared KVM Switch
• Fax Devices: Dialogic BrookTrout 1034 boards, TruFax Boards and Dialogic Diva Fax Board(s) supported by the Diva Server, installed in PCI and
PCI(e) slots
• Fax Application Interfaces: RightFax Fax Server(s) v7.x and above
• NOTE: For higher volume (12 to 48 line) systems, increased processor
speed provides excellent performance benefits. For systems beyond 48
lines, excellent disk I/O speed, increased processor speed and memory are
essential. Please contact technical support for assistance and recommendations.
Fax boards create a substantial amount of heat. If you plan to install the board(s)
in rack mounted servers, use at least a 2U server.
The best results are obtained when TargetFax is the only application software running on the server. Do not install TargetFax on a computers that serves as domain
controllers, Exchange Servers or Terminal servers.
TargetFax stores data in Microsoft Access databases that can easily be repaired
with Access. If a database becomes corrupt, you can fix it more conveniently if
Access is installed on the TargetFax Server.
TargetFax Workstation Modules
The TargetFax Client software must be install on the computer where the TargetFax Server is installed. or standalone in a local area network environment. Organizations with local area networks can install the TargetFax Client on workstations
that meet the following requirements:
• P3, 800mhz, 256mb of RAM and 3GB of Hard Drive Space
• Minimum Resolution 1024x768 recommended High Color or True Color)
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
23
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
• Windows XP® Pro Business Edition SP1, Windows 2000® Workstation
and Windows Vista®
Additional Requirements for TargetFax Server and Modules(s)
After TargetFax is installed, do not change the computer name. If you change the
name, the TargetFax tray icon does not load.
If you are running virus or spyware protection software, you must configure it to
exclude detection of *.TIF, *.STA, *.DCF, *.LOG, *.TXT, *.LCK, *.RTE, *.LST
files. You should also disable virus protection during heavy broadcasting.
Note: TargetFax does not support the anti-virus/spyware software “real time file
scanning” feature. If this feature is enabled, it will severely degrade system performance.
If you have any questions or concerns, please call TargetFax Support.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
24
Chapter - 2 TargetFax System Administration
This chapter explains how to use the TargetFax System Administrator to
license components and Servers, administer users, and set up Administrator alerts. It also includes an overview of the System Administrator
menus and toolbars.
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Licensing Manager
Before you configure the TargetFax WorkServer, FaxServers or components, you must license the
TargetFax System Administrator. When the System Administrator starts for the first time, it displays the TargetFax License Manager. You can also access the License Manager by selecting the
Licenses option, in the System Administrator Tools menu.
The Module list box displays the modules available for license activation. The TargetFax System
Administrator, Broadcast Manager, Mail Connector and Services Module (TargetFax Client) are
always available. The other modules do not appear, and therefore cannot be licensed, until these
are imported or installed.
To obtain a license key by e-mail, complete the following procedure:
1. Click the TargetFax License Manager
zation code to the Clipboard.
Copy button. This moves the authori-
2. Open an e-mail message, and address it to license@otgt.com.
3. Paste (Ctrl+v) the code into the e-mail message. Also include your name, company name and the name of your One Touch Sales Representative.
4. Send the message.
Enter your license key(s) as follows:
1. In the e-mail message you receive from One Touch Global Technologies, select
and copy (Crtl+c) the license key that starts with an “A.”.
The first character of the license key indicates the module it is used to license.
A
System Administrator
B
BarCode Module
D
TargetFax Connector for MFPs
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
24
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
G
FTP Connector
H
HP Digital Sender
J
Broadcast Manager
M
Mail Connector
P
PDF2TIF Component
R
RightFax Connector
S
TargetFax FaxServer Services
Module
T
TELEform Connector
Z
Alchemy Connector
I
Image Pro
X
XML Component
D
Connector for MFPs
W
Router Client
2. In the Module list box, select TargetFax System Adminstrator.
3. Click the
Paste button.
4. Click Apply.
5. If you received license keys for the Broadcast Manager or Services Module,
repeat steps one through four using the license keys for these products. Any
remaining license keys cannot be applied until more modules have been added
to TargetFax.
6. Click OK.
NOTE: Though you can start the System Administrator without first licensing
your modules, you cannot use TargetFax.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
25
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
System Administrator Main Menu
Before continuing with the configuration of the Windows services that control fax
board and TargetFax operation, please familiarize yourself with the TargetFax
Toolbar Icons and menu commands used to accomplish these tasks.
File menu
File menu commands become active in response to the tree view item you select.
File Menu with System Selected
When a System level icon is selected, only the Import New Component command is active. This command adds a new application or service. This is the only
option for the classes branch of the tree view. Importation of new components
(BarCode, MailConnector, TeleFORM, etc.) is explained in the chapters related to
the usage of these products.
File Menu Servers Selected
When a server, such as WorkService or MailServer, is selected, you can also
export components and add/Install new services.
File Menu Service Selected
When a service is selected, that service can be removed.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
26
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
The View Menu
The Reload Tree command displays all for the lowest leaves of the tree view.
The Tools Menu
Refresh: Updates the information displayed in the Queues/Schedule tab.
When a service is selected, you can start a stopped or paused service. If the service
is started, you can pause or stop it.
Pause: This command is active when you select a service that can be paused with
the Window Services Administrative Tool.
Restart Service: Starts a paused service
Stop Service: Use this command before you do database maintenance.
Reinstall Service: Use this command after you upgrade the TargetFax Client and
Server.
Database Utilities: See repair and upgrade utilities in “Chapter - 11 Database
Maintenance” on page 249.
Logging Information: Process logs are available for the System, the servers, and
all Services. To see the log or set the log level for one of these items, select a leaf
of the tree view before you click the Logging Information command.
Changes made to Logging Information affect only the logs generated for the leaf
selected in the tree view
Log detail levels are ERROR ONLY, DEBUG, INFO, and NONE.
• INFO: Standard indication of events, actions and warnings. This is the recommended level of detail.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
27
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
•DEBUG: Use this setting only if instructed to do so by TargetFax Technical Support.
•ERROR: Logs errors only.
Select the interval for log archival, in the Archive Log list box. If you click
Every, you can type the number of days in the days box.
Select the interval for log deletion in the Delete Logs list box. If you click Every,
you can type the number of days in the days box.
NewLog: Click this button to save the current log, and create a new one.
Click the View button to open the log in Notepad. In the Notepad File menu, click
the Save as button to create a log file for TargetFax Support.
Licenses: Displays the TargetFax License Manager. Instructions for application of
license keys are provided in the chapters that describe the installation of these
modules and components, and on page 24 of this chapter.
System Administrator Toolbar
Like menu commands, toolbar icons become active when you select tree view
items that the buttons can act upon. In the example above, the four buttons on the
right are displayed because a service is selected in the tree view.
Adds new Servers, Services or
Groups
Removes the selected group, class,
Server or Service
The Save button. Used most often to
save board service configuration,
before starting the service.
The Undo button.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
28
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
Updates the information displayed in
the Queues/Schedule tab
Start a service
Stop a service
Pause a service. This applies only to
services that can be paused in the
Windows Services Administrative
Tool.
Restarts a paused service
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
29
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
User Administration
With the Users Class selected in the tree view, you can:
• See and change the default receiver. Faxes that are not routed to other users
are directed to this user’s list of received faxes, in the Fax Manager.
• Add and modify user profiles
• See and select the cover page and topic sent to users as notification of
events
• Click User Events to View the Fax Manager. “Checking the Status of Sent
and Received Faxes” on page 53 of the TargetFax User Guide.
• Select or create the Default Sender of sent faxes
Set Default Receiver
Select or create the default receiver as follows:
1. In the tree view, click the Users icon, to display the User Class.
2. To change the default receiver, click the Default Receiver ellipsis, and select
another user.
From here, you can add a new user, or change the User Profile for an existing
user.You can also access User Profiles by clicking the System Administrator User
Profiles button. But the User Profile can only be set with the Default User button.
To view more columns, click the Windows Maximize button. In this larger display
you can sort on DID, e-mail address and any other user profile data that you need
to check for inclusion, accuracy and redundancy.
3. Double-click the user who will be the Default Receiver.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
30
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
4. Click the Add Individuals button. If this button isn’t in the toolbar, your user
profile probably lacks the authority to edit security.
5. Click the More button.
6. Type the user’s contact information.
7. To add the user to an existing group, select a group, in the Groups list box.
To add the user to a new group, type the name of a new group in the Groups
list box.
8. If the entry for the User Logon box is not the Windows Domain user name for
this user, change it to the Domain user name. This is the user name that TargetFax displays. This name must be correct before you can set this user’s rights.
By default, new users have General User permissions which allow these users to
start and use TargetFax programs. For an explanation of user rights options see
“Set User Rights” on page 33.
Importing Users
TargetFax facilitates the importation of Active Directory user group members as
TargetFax users. We suggest that you create a domain local scope group to which
you add all TargetFax users.
Importation of Directory and Security information is optional. When security
information is not imported each new user has General User rights which you can
edit as you find necessary. If you import Directory and Security information, TargetFax allocates rights to users according to these rules:
• Domain Administrators are given TargetFax Administrator rights.
• Users with the characters “admin” in their user name become TargetFax
Supervisors.
• All other users become TargetFax General Users.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
31
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Before TargetFax can identify your user groups, you must specify the domain to
which the TargetFax server belongs as follows:
1. In the System Administrator tree view, click the Users icon.
2. Under Users Class, click the Users button.
3. Click the Domain button.
4. Type your domain name, and click OK. In the example below, the domain
name is OTGT.
5. Click OK a second time.
To import the users and add them to TargetFax:
1. In the tree view, click the Users icon.
2. Click the Domain Groups ellipsis, to display the LDAP User Groups.
3. Check all of the user groups that you want to import, and then click OK. The
name of the imported Group(s) appears in the Domain Groups box.
4. Click the Users button to display the imported users.
5. Click the Export button.
6. Name and save the exported users txt file. Then click the Save button.
7. Check each of the fields you want to export from Active Directory to TargetFax, and click Save.
Import the users to TargetFax as follows:
1. Click the User Profiles button, to display the Users list.
2. In the tool bar, click the Import Users button.
3. Click the export file you saved, and then the Open button.
4. Select an update option, and click OK.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
32
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
The new users are added to the user list.
Set the Default Sender
Faxes forwarded from the HP Digital Sender or from a directory of saved images
(dropped files) might not be sent with the sender information required in order to
list the faxes among the a user’s events in the Fax Manager. When this occurs,
TargetFax lists the sent faxes among the events of the default sender designated
for this purpose.
To create or change the default sender, click Default Sender ellipsis, and then
proceed as you would to change the default user, as described above.
Set User Rights
Using Targetfax User Administration, you can create TargetFax users who have
only the rights they need to perform their required tasks. This assures document
confidentiality and system integrity.
Use the following procedure to set user rights for any TargetFax user:
1. Click the User Level list box, and select a user level.
2. If necessary, clear or check box(es) to remove or add Specific Rights.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
33
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
User Levels
Associate
A TargetFax individual who doesn’t use TargetFax
applications. Faxes and notifications are routed to this
user’s e-mail account.
General
This user can use the TargetFax Client and Broadcast
Manager with no administrative privileges.
Power User
This user can use the TargetFax Client and Broadcast
Manager, and view and change User Profile for all
users, and add/edit/delete documents and recipients.
Supervisor
Supervisors have Power User rights. They can also
view fellow members events, use the System Administrator, view events of fellow members and work with
recipient records, library documents, BillCodes, the
Router and Dialing Plans.
Administrator
This level has all privileges, including the authority to
edit fax routing, run the Router in design mode, set
rights for all users and view all user’s events.
Specific Rights
Logon to Applications
The ability to start the TargetFax Client, Broadcast
Manager and Fax Manager
View User Profile
The user can change User Profile information for all
users.
View Events for All
Users In Group
The user can view documents sent to and received by
users of the group to which the user belongs. Users
who process other user’s faxes need this right.
Run System Administrator
Start the TargetFax System Administrator and view
group events of the group to which this user belongs
View/Edit Routing
See and change how received faxes are directed in TargetFax Workflow. Enables editing of WorkServer Custom/Routing Rules in the System Administrator, and
user routing information. Enables viewing of all user’s
events in the Fax Manager and the Router design view.
Edit Security
Enables viewing and changing user rights in User Profiles.
Add/Edit/Delete Recip- Write privileges for creating and editing of recipient
records
ients
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
34
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
Add/Edit/Delete
Library Documents
Write privileges for creating and editing library documents
Add/Edit/Delete Bill
Code and Dial Plans
Write privileges for Dialing Plans and RightFax
BillCodes
Run Router Client
Route received faxes with the TargetFax Router
Events are Private to
User Supervisor
Events of a user with this restriction are not visible to
members of this user’s group who only have the right
to view events of other group members. Only this user
and members of this user’s group with the Run System Administrator Specific Right can view this
user’s events.
3. To give this user temporary rights, check Expires After, and set the date and
time when rights will be revoked.
4. Click OK.
5. Click the Add button, to add this user.
6. Click OK, to make this user the default receiver. Click Cancel, to close this
Window without changing the default receiver.
7. In the File menu, click the Save Users Class Info command.
Note: Changes to user rights take effect when the TargetFax tray icon loads during
Window startup, or when you start the TargetFax tray icon from the Start menu.
Before you can start the tray icon, right-click the tray icon and click Exit to
unload it.
User Groups
Group capabilities enable you to work with TargetFax users in aggregate. This is
useful when you want to send the same fax or e-mail message to multiple users or
view events related to the activities of the members of a group.
To add a user to a group, you type or select a group name in the Group box of the
User Profile.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
35
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
To display a group’s events, in the Fax Manager, click an item in the User list that
begins with an asterisk.
To forward faxes to the e-mail addresses or fax numbers of a group see “Default
Inbound Routing to an E-mail Address” on page 145 and “File and Directory
Naming Parameters” on page 144.
Group Access to Faxes
You might want to assign several people to read, act upon and respond to the faxes
received by one user account. This “user’s” faxes could consist of all the faxes
sent to the same DID or received by the default TargetFax user. This could be
more fax volume than the users who log on to these TargetFax accounts can attend
to.
To give multiple users the right to view the same faxes, add all of these users to
the same group. Then give each group member the Specific Rights to Log on to
Applications and View Events For All Users in Group. These users will now
access group events by clicking group member user names in the Fax Manager
Users list box. Additional Specific Rights may also be necessary to enable these
users to route and forward these events.
In order to view all group member events simultaneously, you must click the
group name in the Users list box. The name of the group to which you belong is
only visible to users with the Use System Administrator Specific Right.
Hint: Group names start with an asterisk.
To hide the events of a user from the view of other group members, give that user
the Events are Private to Users/Supervisor Specific Right. TargetFax Supervisors have the Use System Administrator Specific Right.
View Users Events
Click the User Events button to display the Fax Manager. The Fax Manager displays inbound faxes and faxes sent with the Client, for all users of the TargetFax
Server. The status of broadcasts sent appears in the Broadcast Manager. Faxes
routed to a user, appear as received by that user. If no routing is used, inbound
faxes appear as received by the default receiver.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
36
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
Right-facing arrows indicate sent faxes; left-facing arrows are incoming. Green
indicates a successful transmission. Red represents a failed transmission (or
Help). Teal (light blue) means the transmission is in process.
Events Filters
The event type filter, with its default setting of All Events, selects the nature of
the events to view.
All Events: All received and sent faxes, at all stages of completion.
Submitted Events: Sent faxes which have not begun to transmit
In Process Faxes: Faxes that are sending
Completed Events: Failed and successfully sent faxes
Successful Events: Faxes that transmitted
Failed Events: Faxes that did not send
Received Events: Faxes received by user
To Review Events: Faxes available for review in the TargetFax Router
Reviewed Events: (Not shown above) faxes that have been opened in the TargetFax Router
The User list box filters the users or groups for whom events are displayed. In the
User list box, users are followed by groups; the names of which are preceded with
asterisks.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
37
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
38
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
Events Toolbar
Icon
Description
Add New Event
Starts the Client
Delete Event(s)
Deletes selected event(s)
Change Contact
Changes contact information (e.g. name, fax number) for
an event
Information
Send Quick Fax
Opens a Client session using the To: information, Attachments and cover pages of a submitted event, or sends a
received fax
View Document
Preview a fax in the TargetFax viewer
Print Reports
Prints/displays event related reports
Find Record in Column
Searches records in the selected column
Quick Filter
Creates a new view of only those records that match the
selected cell
Select All
Selects all displayed records (excellent with Quick Filter)
Abort Events
Stops a fax that is sending
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
Use this option to perform complex filtering of records,
and to modify groups of records.
39
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Forward Events
Sends sent and received faxes to your choice of TargetFax
users
Reprocess Events
Resends selected event(s) to the original recipient
Update Status
Refreshes the view of events
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
40
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
User Assistance Tools
These buttons, which display when you click the tree view Users icon, provide
administrator access to tools found in the TargetFax Client.
Data Sources
This button displays the Data Sources view of Database, Excel, CSV and text
recipient files saved to the TargetFax library. To add, remove or view data sources,
see “Recipient Selection” on page 39 The TargetFax User Guide.
Topics
This button displays the topics in the TargetFax library. Topics are the text
inserted into fax cover pages or sent as the body of e-mail messages. From this list
of documents, you can add, view, delete and edit topics. See “Cover Page Topics”
on page 44 of The TargetFax User Guide.
Library Doc
This button displays the library documents list, from which you can add or
remove documents available to users as attachments in the library. See “Recipient
Selection” on page 39”of The TargetFax User Guide.
Overlays
Overlay fields are variable information from user, sender or external database
records that is inserted in cover sheets and attachments to personalize the fax. See
“Chapter - 5 Overlay Fields” of the TargetFax User Guide.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
41
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
System Defaults for Notifications
The default cover pages and topics sent as notification of events, such as received
faxes or completed broadcast jobs are specified by default for all applicable tree
view leaves.
Users Class Notifications
In the tree view, click the Users icon to display the User Class. The cover page
you select, with the Default Cover ellipsis, becomes the default cover page automatically sent as fax notification of inbound events. This is the cover page that
holds the topic selected for the notification. From the CoverPage to Use window
you can select, edit or create a default cover page.
The default topic sent as e-mail notification is the “Notify” topic. Click the Topics
button to edit, create or select topics. The topic you select is inserted into the
default cover page.
WorkServer Alerts
WorkServer Alerts report changes in the “state” (Running, Stalled, Shut down) of
all TargetFax services and problems anticipated with the size of the TargetFax
databases. By default, the first alert is sent when a database reaches 1500 MB.
Alerts are resent with each 150 MB increment of database growth.
Set up a WorkServer Alerts as follows:
1. In the tree view, click WorkServer Services.
2. Check the Alerts/Actions box, to activate this feature.
3. Click the Alerts/Actions ellipsis, followed by the Edit Action/Rule button, to
display the Custom Action/Rule.
The default Custom Action/Rule sends the AdminAlert topic, by e-mail, from the
MAILADMIN user to the ADMINISTRATOR user.
Click the To ellipsis, and select the user who will receive the message. Click the
From ellipsis, and select the user who will send the e-mail message. Make sure
the User Profile for the sender and the recipient contains an e-mail address. To
send a different topic, click the What ellipsis, and select another topic. To send
the message as a fax, click the By ellipsis, and select Fax.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
42
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
The default Alert Wait value is 30 seconds. This defines the interval at which
scans for the changed state of the services are conducted. The e-mail messages
sent will have a subject that begins with “Alert 1 of 2” or “Alert 1 of 4.” The second number indicates the number of services that have changed states during the
Alert Wait interval. The body of the message reports the details of these changes.
Note: If you add a new user, with a distinctive name, such as “Alerter,” it will be
easier to identify TargetFax notifications in your e-mail client inbox.
Since WorkServer Services reports changes in the state of the other services, you
need to create a second work server service so that each WorkServer service can
report on the other.
1. Add a WorkServer Service as described in “Start the WorkServer Service” on
page 82.
2. In the Queues/Schedule tab, disable of the Main queue, at the top of the list.
3. In the Server Setup tab, clear the check from the Submit Scheduled Jobs
check box.
4. Click the Save Server Info button, and restart the service.
Barcode Alerts
See “Sending a Notification when No BarCodes are Detected” on page 235.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
43
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
WorkServer Inbound Routing Defaults
When WorkServer Services is selected in the tree view, the default Copy To directories for Digitech, PDF and TIFF are displayed. You can edit these directory
paths here, or in the User Profile that controls the placement and naming of these
saved files. Doc Profile displays the default profile used for bar code, split fax,
PDF2TIF and IMAGE Pro operations.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
44
C h a p t e r - 2 Ta r g e t F a x S y s t e m A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
Multi-Server Performance Tuning
Multi-WorkServer Setup
The WorkServer Server Setup tab has three check boxes you can clear to limit
redundant processes in installations with multiple WorkServers.
Archive/Delete Logs: One WorkServer can update and archive the log files generated by all FaxServer Services and WorkServer Services. You can save some
system overhead by disabling this process on all but one WorksServer.
Check Status Files: This process unlocks files that need to be updated. You can
save some system overhead by disabling this process on all but one WorksServer.
Submit Scheduled Jobs: If more than one WorkServer is reading records to
determine if jobs are ready to send, one of the WorkServers may encounter locked
records. For this reason, we recommend that only one Workserver perform this
task.
Multi-FaxServer Setup
The Merge Own Header/Forms and Merge Own Overlay Fields check boxes
appear in the Server Setup tabs of FaxServer Services. Enabling these features
improves fax server throughput on multiple board server installations by transferring these functions from a WorkServer to the FaxServer(s). Check these boxes if
your system will have more than one FaxServer Service.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
45
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
46
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
This chapter presents information about Dialogic BrookTrout and Dialogic Diva fax
boards. It begins with an explanation of preparation and installation of Dialogic
BrookTrout fax boards on the Window NT, 2000 and 2003 operating systems. Dialogic Diva fax board installation procedures, product features and a list of supported
Dialogic Diva boards begins on page 64.
Dialogic BrookTrout Board Installation Sequence
Complete the steps that are applicable to your fax board in the following sequence:
1. Confirm the compatibility and suitability of your Dialogic BrookTrout board. See
“Dialogic BrookTrout Fax Boards’ on page 48.
2. Prepare Dialogic BrookTrout fax board switches and other settings. See page 51.
3. Prepare T1 connection. See page 55.
4. Turn the server off, and insert the fax board.You must install the Dialogic BrookTrout fax board(s) on the same computer where you will install the TargetFax
Server.
5. Install additional boards (optional). See page 57.
6. Start the computer, and disable Plug and Play detection for the slot(s) where the fax
board(s) is installed. See page 62.
7. We recommend that you run the Dialogic BrookTrout diagnostic program (FVD for
Drivers v4.5 - v4.7) for your fax board. You can download these programs at
http://www.dialogic.com/support/helpweb/brooktrout/test.htm.
These programs confirm that the fax board, computer, and phone line connections
are functioning correctly. After making this determination, you can proceed with
“Chapter - 4 Installing TargetFax Software to the Server’ on page 41.
Caution: If you are using TargetFax in conjunction with RightFax to send faxes,
please read “Chapter - 12 TargetFax for RightFax’ on page 267 for instructions
regarding the fax board configuration.
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Dialogic BrookTrout Fax Boards
TargetFax supports the following Dialogic BrookTrout fax board configurations:
• Dialogic BrookTrout TruFax for analog phone systems. “AFR” (Automatic
Fax Removal) is not supported by TruFax boards.
• Dialogic BrookTrout TR114 Series, for analog or digital phone systems
• Dialogic BrookTrout T1034 Series, for digital phone systems
• Dialogic BrookTrout NetAccess Series. Provides a T1/E1 interface to
TR114 series installations
WARNING: Be sure you are in a static free environment when you install the
Dialogic BrookTrout fax board. Static discharge can severely damage your fax
board and void its warranty.
TargetFax supports the Dialogic BrookTrout fax boards listed below:
TruFax Analog Series
TruFax 100 Tr114
1-port loop start fax board, PCI or uPCI
TruFax 200 TR114
2-port loop start fax board, PCI or uPCI
901-03-050
TruFax 100 TR1034
1-port loop start fax board, PCIe
901-004-07
TruFax 200 TR1034
2-port loop start fax board, PCIe
901-004-08
TR114 Analog Series (ISA, PCI or uPCI)
TR114+I2L
2 port fax board, ISA (L = Loop Start Interface)
TR114+P2L
2 port fax board, PCI (L = Loop Start Interface)
TR114+uP2L
2 port fax board, uPCI (L = Loop Start Interface)
TR114+I4L
4 port fax board, ISA (L = Loop Start Interface)
TR114+P4L
4 port fax board, PCI (L = Loop Start Interface)
TR114+uP4L
4 port fax board, uPCI (L = Loop Start Interface)
Loop Start Interface (LSI) is a regular analog line, like a house phone. Other
supported fax boards may support DID (Direct Inward Dial) phone circuits, which
allow you to receive inbound faxes routed to user’s received events. “C” identifies
a Combination (Half DID, Half LSI). All DID fax boards require a Tellabs power
supply.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
48
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
TR114 Digital Series MVIP (ISA or PCI)
TR114+I2P
2 port fax board, ISA
TR114+P2V
2 port fax board, PCI
TR114+I4P
4 port fax board, ISA
TR114+I4V
4 port fax board, ISA
TR114+P4V
4 port fax board, PCI
TR114+I8P
8 port fax board, ISA
TR114+I8V
8 port fax board, ISA
TR114+P8V
8 port fax board, PCI
TR114+I8V-T1
8 port fax board/T1, ISA
TR114+P8V-T1
8 port fax board/T1, PCI
TR114+I12V
12 port fax board, ISA
TR114+I16V
16 port fax board, ISA
TR114+P16V
16 port fax board MVIP, PCI
Note: The TR114 Digital PCI boards do not support PCI-X Slots. See the TR1034
Series.
TR1034 Digital Series for T1 Interface Environments
TR1034+P24H-T1
24 port v.34 fax board with on board T1/PRI uPCI
TR1034+P16H-T1
16 port v.34 fax board with on board T1/PRI uPCI
TR1034+P8H-T1
8 port v.34 fax board with on board T1/PRI uPCI
TR1034+P4H-T1
4 port v.34 fax board with on board T1/PRI uPCI
TR1034 Digital Series for E1 Interface Environments
TR1034+P30H-E1
30 port v.34 fax board with on board E1/PRI uPCI
TR1034+P20H-E1
20 port v.34 fax board with on board E1/PRI uPCI
TR1034+P16H-E1
16 port v.34 fax board with on board E1/PRI uPCI
TR1034+P10H-E1
10 port v.34 fax board with on board E1/PRI uPCI
TR1034+P8H-E1
8 port v.34 fax board with on board E1/PRI uPCI
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
49
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
TR1034 Analog Series (no DID support, just loop start)
TR1034+P2L
2 port v.34 fax board with uPCI
TR1034+P4L
4 port v.34 fax board with uPCI
TR1034+P8L
8 port v.34 fax board with uPCI
TR1034 DID
TR1034+UP4D-T1
4 port v.34 fax board with on board T1/PRI uPCI
TR1034+UP2D-T1
2 port v.34 fax board with on board T1/PRI uPCI
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
50
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
Dialogic BrookTrout Fax Board Preparation
This section describes how to set up the supported fax boards.
TR114 (PCI) Digital T1 Fax Boards
Before you insert a fax board into your server, you must configure the dip
switches located on the top edge of the fax board.
1 and 2 on is terminated
T1 Settings
MVIP Settings
MVIP Termination
T1 Settings: Be sure to select the
correct Framing and Line Coding.
Cable Length: The standard is all
Down, unless your cable is longer
than 132 feet.
MVIP Settings: The above settings
are typical, except the last board
must be “terminated.” For one
board (ex: P8V-T1), set termination. For two boards, set the P8VT1 to unterminated, and the last
board (ex: P16V) to terminated.
Note: If you have a full T1 e.g. TR114 P8V+T1, and a
TR114+P16V, you must connect these boards on the top with an
MVIP cable.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
51
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
TR034 (PCI-X) Digital Fax Boards
TR 1034 series digital boards support voice T1 standard (robbed bit), T1-PRI, and
E1 connections.
The rotary switch on 1034 fax boards represents a unique board ID number, used
to distinguish between the boards in multi-board installations. The default rotary
switch setting is usually “2.”
If you will be installing more than one TR 1034 in this computer, check the position of the rotary switch before you insert the board into your server. You will
need this information for the TargetFax module setting. When you install additional TR 1034 boards, set the rotary switches to numbers not used on other
boards before you install the boards.
TR114 and TruFax Analog PCI Fax Boards
Analog fax boards do not require special termination or signaling settings.
If you are installing more than one Trufax board, set the rotary dials, on the top of
the boards, to a different numbers. Check the position of the rotary switch before
you insert the board into your server. You will need this information for the TargetFax Module setting.
The phone company requires you to use a Telllabs power supply with analog DID
fax boards. This power supply is usually purchased along with the fax board. DID
service requires the Telllabs power supply.
Warning: Never plug regular DID cables (red sleeve) into regular analog jacks.
This could damage the board.
BrookTrout produced two versions of the TR114 and TruFax fax boards. The part
number of the newer boards contains a “u” (universal) designation (e.g. TR114uP4L). Universal PCI cards are dual keyed to fit in PCI and PCI-X sockets. The
older PCI boards only fit in PCI slots.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
52
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
TargetFax supports the new PCIe Dialogic BrookTrout TR1034 and TruFax
boards.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
53
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Brooktrout ISA Fax Boards
If you are installing Brooktrout ISA fax boards, make sure you eliminate any IRQ,
I/O address, hardware or system resource conflicts.
We recommend that you document the I/O addresses, DMA channels, and interrupts selected for each installed fax board. You will need this information when
you configure the TargetFax board server to use the Brooktrout board.
Brooktrout NetAccess Cards
NetAccess boards are Brooktrout fax boards that allow TR114 digital fax boards
to support T1-PRI and E1 phone circuits. The configuration procedure for this
card is provided on page 94 of “Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services.”
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
54
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
T1 Provisioning
T1 configurations require Dialogic BrookTrout digital series TR114 T1 or
TR1034 T1 fax boards, and support from either your telephony provider, or inhouse phone switch. When working with the telephony provider, or your in-house
phone system, please refer to the following specifications:
Product Manufacturer
Dialogic
Product Name
TR1034 T1 or TR114 T1
T1 Service Type
Voice Only, Robbed-bit, four-wire
Signal Protocol
E&M Wink
Line Coding
B8ZS
Frame Mode
Extended Super Frame
Channels
1-24
Dial Tone
Optional
CSU
Not on-board
DNIS Digits
DTMF
SOC
6.0F
FIC
04DU9-1SN 1.544Mbps ESF+B8ZS
FCC Registration Number:
EAGUSA-24598-CN-N
Wall Jack Required
USOC-RJ-48C
T1 Service Type
Use only a “robbed-bit” (also referred to as an “A/B signaling”, or “E&M tie
trunk”) T1 line with Dialogic BrookTrout boards. This type of signaling is “inband” (the signaling information is carried on the same channel as the traffic).
There must be a 4-wire connection; Dialogic BrookTrout supports no other type
of physical connection.
Signal Protocol
Dialogic BrookTrout boards need a consistent bidirectional signal protocol across
all T1 channels. As Brooktrout uses the term, “E&M” means that the signaling
bits do the same as the “A” bit.Your telco representative should know what this
means.
Important Note: Dialogic BrookTrout boards do not support T1 ground-start signaling.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
55
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Additional Signal Regeneration and CSU Information
Dialogic BrookTrout boards are not approved as a “CSU” (Channel Service Unit).
If the last point of T1 circuit signal regeneration is more than 500 feet of cable
length from the fax board, you must connect a CSU between the board and the
T1circuit.
DNIS and Trunk Assignment
You or your telco representative must know the number of active trunks that will
be placed on the T1, which time slots those trunks will occupy, and the number of
DID/DNIS digits the telco delivers on in-bound calls.
Connect to the T1 Telephone Service
Before you install the Dialogic BrookTrout board make sure you have enough T1
cable to connect to the TargetFax Server.
Important: You and your telco are responsible for providing the Robbed-Bit T1,
cabling and pin outs according to the diagram on page 51. Failure to do this may
result in additional work, expense and project delays.
If your telephone service provider, or PBX support people are unfamiliar with the
Dialogic BrookTrout board, ask them to view the board as a PBX. Your telco people should set up a “tie trunk”, or “tie line”, to the board, just as if they were setting up a line to a PBX. The service must be tie line/tie trunk. Off-premises
extensions or stations are not supported.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
56
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
Installing Additional Boards
Some TargetFax installations require multiple fax boards to accommodate their
broadcast and WorkFlow requirements. Two factors limit the type and number of
boards that one server can accommodate: TargetFax compatibility and the capacity of the server.
Note: If you are installing multiple fax boards, please refer to the manufacturer’s
documentation for additional installation tips.
Server Capacity
The number of fax boards that you can install on a server is limited by:
• The number of available slots
• Memory available for board IO addresses
• The overall processing power of the server (memory, disk IO, processor
speed, etc.)
TargetFax Compatibility
Fax Board Compatibility
All boards installed as one FaxServer Service must be from the same Brooktrout
series. If you have installed a TruFax TR114 board, you can only add another
board from this series. This logic applies to the TR114 and TR1034 boards. Only
cards from the same series can be combined in as one FaxServer Service. Boards
of another series must be installed as part of a separate FaxServer Service. See
“Installing Additional Boards’ on page 111 of “Chapter -6 Add the WorkServer
and Board Services.”
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
57
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Installing Fax Boards on Two Computers
While we recommend that all fax boards be installed on one TargetFax server,
sometimes, when slots are unavailable, and fax board(s) must be installed on a
second computer.
Install TargetFax and the fax boards as follows:
1. Prepare and install the fax boards in both computers, as described in this chapter. “Disabling Dialogic BrookTrout Windows Device Drivers’ on page 62.
2. Install the TargetFax Server and Client software as described in “Chapter - 4
Installing TargetFax Software to the Server’ on page 41.
3. On the computer where the Server software was installed, configure and start
the services as described in “Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services’ on page 79.
4. Apply the authorization codes to license purchased modules displayed in the
Modules list box. See “Licensing Manager’ on page 24.
5. Start the TargetFax Client, and send a fax to test the system.
6. On the other Server, install the TargetFax Client modules, as described in
“Chapter - 5 Installing the TargetFax Client Modules Separately from the
Server’ on page 49.
7. Start the System Administrator, and apply the authorization codes to license
purchased modules displayed in the Modules list box of the License Manager.
8. Configure and start the Board Server Service, as described in “Chapter - 5 Add
the WorkServer and Board Services’ on page 79. Be sure to select the Administrator Network Account as the logon account for this service.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
58
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
Ordering DID Telephone Service
This section explains North American analog DID service. For information on
digital DID service, commonly referred to as “DNIS”, consult with your T1 service provider.
Analog DID
For DID Service, you must obtain from the telephone company:
• One DID telephone trunk for each TR114/TR1034 DID interface you plan
to use.
• A block of DID telephone numbers associated with the trunk(s).
• Before you order DID telephone service you must provide the telephone
company with:
A source of -48V DC power
The power supply must be installed and running on the TR114/TR1034 before the
telephone company can activate a DID line. Once the DID line is activated, 48V
DC power must be continuous to prevent DID service disconnection. You, as the
end user, need to supply the voltage on the DID line, through a power supply that
connects to your fax board; your phone company must never put any voltage on
the line from their end.
A specification of the DID service options you want
Before you order DID service, find out which DID service options are available in
your area, and decide which options you want. The following service options
determine how your DID service will operate:
trunk type
two-wire, tip-and-ring loop start trunk that
works off battery reversal
service type
wink vs. immediate (wink recommended)
digit length
the number of routing digits (usually three or
four)
signaling type
DTMF vs. Pulse (DTMF recommended)
Trunk Type
As stated in the chart above, the phone company needs to give you a two-wire
loop start trunk that works off “battery reversal” (the end user puts the voltage on
the trunk.)
Service Type
The TR114/TR1034 supports both wink-start and immediate-start service types.
Dialogic BrookTrout recommends wink-start because it is faster and more accurate. The following table describes the differences between wink-start and immediate-start service.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
59
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Service Type
Interdigit Delay Time
Wink-Start
The TR114/TR1034 expects to see the first DID
digit within five seconds after the telephone is activated. Each successive digit must arrive within five
seconds of the previous digit. (The “wink” is a voltage reversal, lasting approximately 200ms, which
the board sends to the telco side after that side has
“seized” the line in preparation to send a call to the
board; this “wink” tells the telco provider that it's
OK to send the DID digits.)
Immediate-Start
The TR114/TR1034 expects to receive the first DID
digit within eighteen seconds after the telephone is
activated. The maximum interdigit delay is eighteen
seconds.
Your phone service provider must tell you if the service is wink or immediate
before you can setup your fax software to tell your fax board the service type
you’ll use.
Digit Length
DID service usually sends the last few digits of the dialed telephone number as a
routing address. Your telco service provider needs to tell you how many DID digits they send (typically it's the last 3 or 4 digits) so that you may set up your fax
software to tell the fax board how many digits to expect after it detects an incoming call.
Signaling Type
Pulse tones are generated by rotary-dial telephones. A series of pulses, simulating
alternating on-hook/off-hook conditions, represents each dialed digit. Important:
Your telephone service provider should send pulse tones at a rate of 10 pulses-persecond (commonly written “10 PPS”). DTMF tones are generated by touch-tone
telephones. Different combinations of two tones, one high-frequency and one
low-frequency, represent each of the digits and characters on the touch-tone telephone keypad.
When the fax board receives a call, it automatically detects the DTMF or pulse
signal. When it dials out, TargetFax tells the board which of the two signaling
types it will use. We strongly recommend DTMF over pulse, as DTMF is much
faster and more accurate. Also, some fax software applications don’t handle pulse
digits correctly.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
60
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
Other Information
The telephone company may also request the TR114 board information listed
below. This information is located on the bottom of the TR114 card, and provided
in the TR114 manual.
The FCC Registration number
EAGUSA-74279-FA-E
The Service order code
9.0F
The type of wall jack required
USOC-RJ-61X
The facility interface code
02RV2-T
TR114, TR114 DID/Combo
All information provided by “Dialogic BrookTrout” and “Brooktrout Technology” (including the Brooktrout and Brooktrout Technology logos), along with the
names of the products identified within this document, are trademarks or registered trademarks (collectively the “Brooktrout Technology Trademarks”) of Dialogic.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
61
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Disabling Dialogic BrookTrout Windows Device Drivers
Dialogic BrookTrout TR114 and TruFax 114 Boards on Window Server 2003
Windows Server 2003 detects and installs the correct drivers for the Brooktrout
TruFax 114 and TR114 boards. If you plan to install Automatic Fax Removal on
Windows 2003, using a TR114 board, see “Configuring AFR (Automatic Fax
Removal)’ on page 86. If you are using a Dialogic BrookTrout 1034 series fax
board e.g. Trufax 1034 or a Windows Server OS other than 2003, follow the
instructions below.
Dialogic BrookTrout TR1034 on All Server Operating Systems, and All Brooktrout Boards
Running on NT and Windows 2000 Servers
The TargetFax installation software installs Dialogic BrookTrout drivers for TR
1034 and TruFax 1034 on all server operating systems, and for all TruFax and
TR114 boards on NT and 2000 servers. Procedures for installation of these drivers
are provided“Chapter - 3 Add the WorkServer and Board Services’ on page 47.
Do not install drivers supplied by Dialogic BrookTrout or other vendors. Do not
allow Windows plug n’ play to configure the board.
Disable Windows device drivers installation for Dialogic BrookTrout TR1034 and
TruFax 1034 (See “TruFax Analog Series’ on page 48 for TruFax 1034 part numbers) on all server operating systems, and all Dialogic BrookTrout boards running
on NT and Windows 2000 servers as follows:
1. After you have inserted the fax board(s), turn on the server.
2. The Windows server operating system detects the board and informs you that
new hardware has been found. The device detected varies from board to board.
Warning: If Windows does not recognize the card, repeat steps one and two using
a different PCI slot. You cannot proceed with the installation until Windows recognizes the new board.
3. The operating system starts the Found New Hardware Wizard, as shown below.
Click Next.
The Found New Hardware Wizard identifies the PCI device, and asks you to recommend the location of the device drivers.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
62
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
4. Make sure the Search for a Suitable Driver for my Device button is selected,
and click Next, to display the Locate Driver Files box.
5. Make sure all of the Optional search locations check boxes are clear, and
click Next. Windows searches and displays the search results.
6. Make sure the Disable the device...option is selected, and click Finish.
Now that you have disabled PCI Plug and Play, the operating system should
accept the fax board(s).
The next chapter describes the installation of the TargetFax device drivers that
detect the fax board, and confirm that it is properly installed and recognized by the
system.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
63
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Dialogic Diva Fax Boards
The Dialogic Diva board must be installed in the server prior to installation of the
Dialogic Diva Server software.
Board Installation
Dialogic Diva fax boards are not plug ‘n play compatible with Windows 2003.
While the operating system must detect the board, it is imperative that you install
no drivers, as the correct drivers will be installed with the Diva Server software.
Install the Dialogic Diva fax board as follows:
1. Turn off the computer, and insert the Dialogic Diva Fax Board(s).
2. Turn on the computer. The Found New Hardware Wizard appears.
3. Click No, not this time, and then click Next.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
64
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
4. Click Install from a list or specific location (advanced), and then the Next
button.
5. Make sure that only Search for best driver in these locations is selected.
Clear all other options, and then click Next.
6. Confirm that No, do not connect to the Internet now is selected and then
click Next.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
65
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
7. Check Don’t prompt me again to install this software. Then click Finish.
Diva Server Software Installation
The TargetFax Server software communicates with the Diva Server software that
controls Dialogic Diva fax boards. The Dialogic Diva Server software version 8.5
is included on the TargetFax distribution CD. Version 8.5 or later is required for
installation on Windows 2003.
The Diva Server software can only be installed after the fax board is installed.
Install the Diva server as follows:
1. Copy the DivAll.exe from the Eicon directory of the TargetFax CD to the
server.
2. Double-click DivAll.exe, to extract the files.
3. Double-click DivaSetup.exe
4. Click Next, to start the installation.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
66
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
5. For your Default Analog Switch Type, select USA/Canada. Then click Next.
6. For the Installation Mode, click the Customized installation: Specify services
that should be installed button. Then click Next.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
67
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
7. Click the Install button.
8. When Diva setup completes, click the Finish button.
9. Click Finish to restart the computer.
Diva Server for Windows will now appear in the Start menu Programs list. The
Diva Installation Reference Guide is located on the TargetFax CD.
Dialogic Diva Board Support
TargetFax supports the following Dialogic Diva Server Adapters.
ISDN BRI Adapters
Diva Server 2FX
Diva Server V-BRI-2
Diva Server BRI-2M 2.0
Diva Server V-4BRI-8
Diva Server BRI-8M 2.0
T1 Adaptors
Diva Server T1/PRI:
Diva Server PRI 3.0:
Diva Server V-PRI:
Diva Server T1/PRI
Diva Server PRI/E1/T1
Diva Server V/PRI/T1-24
Diva Server T1/PRI-4M
Diva Server PRI/E1/T1-8
Diva Server T1/PRI-8M
Diva Server PRI/T1-24
Diva Server T1/PRI-24M
Analog Adaptors
Diva Server Analog
Diva Server V-Analog
Diva Server Analog-4P
Diva Server-4P
Diva Server Analog-8P
Diva Server-8p
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
68
Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation
Dialogic Diva Voice and Fax Features
• Fax compression (MH, MR 2D coding, MMR T.6 coding) and error correction mode (ECM)
• Fax connections up to 33,6 kbps
• Class 1 and class 2 fax interface (supports group 2 fax machines)
• Fax polling
• Extended fax
• Fax tone detection
• Reversal of fax detection
• Dynamic switching
Ordering an ISDN PRI Line for Your Diva Server T1/PRI Adapter
Specify the following requirements when you place your order:
• 23 B-channels + 1 D-channel
• D-channel on channel 24 (timeslot 24). Do not order NFAS (non-facility
associated signaling service), which enables you to use channel 24 as a
data-carrying B-channel
• Layer 1 line code is B8ZS with ESF (Extended SuperFraming)
• Data rate of 1.544 Mbps
• 64 kbps clear channel service which ensures calls will not be routed over 56
kbps channels
• Compounding type is µ-law
• A CSU is not required (Diva supplies the function of the CSU internally).
However, you can connect to a CSU if present.
• The T1 interface number must be 0.
• The D-channel must be specified as the terminal endpoint identifier (TEI) 0.
• If the switch type is AT&T/Lucent, request that allocation of channels for
incoming calls is in descending order, high to low (23 to 1).
Information to Obtain when You Order Phone Lines
You need to know several characteristics of your line service before you can properly configure your Diva Server T1/PRI adapter. Obtain the following information
when you place your order:
• The type of ISDN switch your line is connected to:
•AT&T/Lucent 4ESS
•AT&T/Lucent 5ESS
•Nortel DMS-100
•Nortel DMS-250
•National ISDN-2 (any switch running NI-2)
•Japan INS-1500
• Directory number assigned to the PRI line
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
69
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
• Line build out setting (LBO). Only if you are going to use the Diva Server's
on-board CSU
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
70
Chapter - 4 Installing TargetFax Software to the Server
The TargetFax Server software runs as a series of Windows services. It is accessed
and controlled by the Client applications included in your license. Most commonly,
these applications are the System Administrator, the TargetFax Client and Broadcast
Manager. These applications are installed on the same computer as the server product, and can be installed on any computer with a network connection to the TargetFax Server. Additional connector applications are available to communicate with
third-party applications, such as Cardiff TELEform and Captaris RightFax.
This chapter explains how to install the TargetFax Server and the most commonly
used Client applications on one computer. Installation of the Client applications for
Terminal Server users is covered in “Installing the TargetFax Client for Terminal Services” on page 127.
TargetFax Installation consists of the following procedures:
1. Review the “Minimum System Requirements” on page 6 of this manual.
2. Install the TargetFax Server software.
Warning: We strongly recommend against installing the TargetFax Server software
on your Terminal Services server, domain controller or Exchange server.
3. Install your TargetFax Client applications to the TargetFax Server.
4. Request and apply your license keys.
5. Configure and start the TargetFax services.
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
6. Install the Client applications on workstations. This step is indicated for installation where users want to send and receive faxes from their desktops without
the use of Terminal Services and for those who wish to use the System Administrator or Broadcast Manager applications, which do not run under Terminal
Services.
7. (Terminal Services only) Create a TargetFax user for each person who will be
using TargetFax through Terminal Services.
8. (Terminal Services only) Install the Submit and Fax Manager Client applications (The Client) on the Terminal Services computer.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
72
C h a p t e r - 4 I n s t a l l i n g Ta r g e t F a x S o f t w a r e t o t h e S e r v e r
Installing TargetFax Software
The TargetFax Server installation program copies all files required to configure
TargetFax on the server. It then starts the Client applications installation program,
which prompts you to select the applications you will install on the server.
Warning: TargetFax saves all data to the directory where it is installed. By default
TargetFax installs to sub-directories of C:\Targetfax. If you prefer not to save
data to drive C:, override the installation default drive setting and install to
another drive. If you subsequently copy the installed TargetFax directory to
another drive or directory the program will no longer start.
Install the TargetFax Server as follows:
1. Confirm that you are installing on a server with a satisfactory computer name.
If you change the computer name after installation, TargetFax becomes inoperable.
2. Before starting, confirm that the time zone is set correctly for this computer.
3. Close all Windows programs.
4. Insert the TargetFax CD into the CD-ROM drive, and double-click the
Setup.exe file. If you downloaded TargetFax, the setup file name includes the
build number, e.g. Setup50335.exe. Don’t install the service pack that ends
with the letters “SP,” e.g. Setup50335SP.exe.
When setup starts on a computer where TargetFax is not installed, the installation
program copies all of the necessary files to the local drive. The Welcome screen
below appears.
5. Click Next, to display the license agreement.
6. Click Yes, to accept the license agreement.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
73
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Use the registration screen to create the Administrator’s user profile.
7. Type your Name and Company.
8. Type your phone number and the fax number on which TargetFax will receive
faxes.
9. Type the serial number provided inside the TargetFax CD jacket. If you downloaded the TargetFax setup program, OTGT Sales supplied you with a serial
number.
10. Click Next.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
74
C h a p t e r - 4 I n s t a l l i n g Ta r g e t F a x S o f t w a r e t o t h e S e r v e r
The default directory for the installation of the TargetFax Server software is
C:\TargetFax. For troubleshooting, and custom application development purposes, we recommend that you install to this directory.
11. Click Next, to accept C:\TargetFax as the destination folder.
The TargetFax installer lets you create an installation backup directory containing
the files replaced during the installation. We recommend that you take this precaution.
12. Click Next, to display the Start Installation box.
If you would like to change any of the installation settings, click Back. Click
Install to continue.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
75
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
After copying the TargetFax files, setup installs the TargetFax Client on the server.
13. Make sure that Continue with Client/Services installation is checked, and
click Finish.
14. Click Next to install the Client.
15. Click Next to select the C:\OTLocal directory.
Important: Do not install TargetFax to the Program Files directory, or any other
directory that has a space in the directory name.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
76
C h a p t e r - 4 I n s t a l l i n g Ta r g e t F a x S o f t w a r e t o t h e S e r v e r
16. Click Install to continue the installation.
After the files are copied, the install program assists you with creating a user
account. This user will be the default receiver and sender of faxes.
17. Type your default receiver information:
User Mailbox: TargetFax displays the network ID of the current domain user in
this box. This user will become a TargetFax System Administrator. Accept this
user name. When TargetFax starts, you will be logged on to TargetFax as a user
with administrative permissions. This is required for completion of the installation. You can delete this user, add users and change their permissions after TargetFax is installed.
FromName: The sender’s name for this user, which appears on faxes
FromFax: The fax number on which TargetFax Server receives faxes
FromPhone: The sender’s phone number
Installing Resources/Applications
Resources/Applications are the programs you use to operate TargetFax. You
must install the System Administrator; this application is required to complete the
installation and configuration of the TargetFax Server. Select which of your
remaining purchased applications to install according to the following considerations:
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
77
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
• Submit/Client - Used for desktop faxing and viewing received faxes
• Fax Printer Driver - Required for conversion of Windows documents to
TIFF images, which can be faxed.
• Broadcast Manager - Used to send and manage transmission of large
groups of faxes. This application does not run under Terminal Services. If
you bought this program, be sure to install it on the Server or a workstation.
• Use Roaming Profiles - This application should only be checked when you
install the Client to a Terminal Services server.
• TeleFORM Connect Agent - Install only if you use TeleFORM
18. Leave Administrative Tools checked. This application must be installed.
19. Make sure the Resources/Applications boxes for your purchased applications are checked, and click OK.
20. Leave both options of the Installation Complete box checked, and click Finish.
The TargetFax installation is complete. The TargetFax icon appears in the system
tray. The System Administrator also starts. The TargetFax System Administrator
is the configuration and management tool for installing fax board drivers and services.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
78
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
This chapter explains how to use the TargetFax System Administrator
to add and configure the WorkServer and FaxServer services. The
WorkServer service controls image management, printing, database
updates and archival functions. The FaxServer Service for Brooktrout
Dialogic and Diva boards is a board service. It controls the sending
and receipt of faxes.
Instructions are also provided for adding and configuring board services for Dialogic Brooktrout and Diva fax boards.
TargetFax requires at least one WorkServer service, and one FaxServer service.
Caution: If you are installing the third-party connectors for Captaris
RightFax or Cardiff Teleform, please begin by reading “Chapter - 12
TargetFax for RightFax” or “Chapter - 13 TargetFax for Cardiff Teleform.”
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Licensing Manager
When the System Administrator starts for the first time, it displays the TargetFax
License Manager. The Module list box displays the applications available for
license activation.
To obtain a license key by e-mail, complete the following procedure:
1. Click the TargetFax License Manager
zation code to the Clipboard.
Copy button. This moves the authori-
2. Open an e-mail message and address it to license@otgt.com.
3. Paste (Ctrl+v) the code into the e-mail message. Also include your name, company name and the name of your One Touch Sales Representative.
4. Send the message.
Enter your license key(s) as follows:
1. The first character of the license key indicates the application or component it
is used to license. In the e-mail message you receive from One Touch Global
Technologies, select and copy (Crtl+c) the license key that starts with an “A.”.
2. In the Module list box, select TargetFax System Adminstrator.
3. Click the
Paste button.
4. Click Apply.
5. Apply the license keys for the Services application (license key starts with “S”)
and E-Mail Connector (starts with “M”).
6. If you purchased the Broadcast Manager, (license key starts with “J”) apply the
license key.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
80
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Additional license keys you may have received can only be applied after the components are installed. See “Licensing Manager” on page 80 for instructions pertaining to licenses for these components. We suggest that you add, configure and
start your WorkServer Service and FaxServer Service, as described in this chapter,
before you install more products.
7. Click OK.
Add the WorkServer Service
Upon exiting the License Manager, TargetFax displays the Add New WORK Service box.
Add a WorkServer service as follows:
1. (Optional) Type a Friendly ID for this WorkServer service.
This is the name that the System Administrator uses to identify the WorkServer
service. The Friendly ID cannot contain blank spaces.
2. Click the Logon As ellipsis.
3. Click the Domain button.
4. Type the name of the domain to which the server is joined and click OK.
5. Click the Network Account ellipsis.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
81
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
6. Select the network account the WorkServer service will run under. This
account must have full control of the C:\TargetFax directory and its subdirectories. Then click OK.
7. Type the password twice and click OK.
8. Click OK again, to add the service.
9. If the new WorkServer service does not display in the Server Setup tab, double-click its icon, in the tree view.
The red dot, next to the WorkServer icon, indicates that the service is stopped.
Start the WorkServer Service
Click the Start Service button, on the toolbar, to start the WorkServer service.
The Last Status box changes to the current date and time; the box to it’s right
changes to Idle.
Note: The WorkServer service now appears in the Windows Services as OTIS
Work Services WORK1.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
82
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Configuring Board Services
The TargetFax board service controls and communicates with the fax board.
Always install the board service on the server where the fax board(s) is installed.
Follow the instructions for the fax board you are configuring.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brooktrout TruFax 100 and 200. See page 84.
Brooktrout TR1034 Digital T1 Series. See page 87.
Brooktrout TR1034 Digital E1 Series. See page 92.
Brooktrout TR1034 Analog. See page 96.
Brooktrout TR114 Analog. See page 100.
Brooktrout TR114 Digital T1. See page 104.
Brooktrout Netaccess Card. See page 110.
Dialogic Diva See page 113.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
83
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Configuring the Brooktrout TruFax 100/200
Brooktrout has manufactured two versions of the TruFax board: the TR 114 and
TR1034 series. The TR1034 series is currently in production. If don’t know which
series you have, look up your part number in “TruFax Analog Series” on page 48
for TruFax part numbers.
Configure the TruFax 100/200 board service as follows:
1. In the tree view, click FaxServer Services.
2. In the toolbar, click the
Install New FAX Service button to display the
Install New FAX Service box.
The Friendly ID is the name by which TargetFax identifies the board service.
3. Type a Friendly ID (optional).
4. In the Server Type list box, select Brooktrout TR1114 or BrookTrout-1034,
depending on your version of TruFax, and click OK.
The Server Path is the Microsoft Windows Network ID computer name for this
server.
5. Click OK to accept (System Account) as the logon account for the board service.
In the example below, the board service FAX1, on computer TIM2003SVR, is
installed using the System Account.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
84
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
The red dot, to the left of the board service name, indicates that the board service
is stopped.
6. To add the board, click the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
7. Click the Add New Board button.
8. You are prompted to select your board. Click your TruFax board, and then OK.
The new TruFax board appears below Fax Boards.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
85
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
9. Click the TruFax board.
Configure Global Settings
The right section of the Board/Channel SetUp tab controls the board, and defines
communication settings for all channels.
Country: If you are installing to a server outside of the United States, select the
country where the server is located.
Global Channel Settings
Leave the Enabled box checked. Based on your TargetFax usage, select the
appropriate communications setting for all channels:
• Broadcast users: Click Send.
• WorkFlow users: Click Recv.
• Mixed usage (Broadcast and WorkFlow): Make sure Both is checked.
Global Board Settings
CSID: The caller subscriber identification for all channels on the board
LSIPfx: Type the prefix to the fax numbers you will be dialing, such as “9” for an
outside line.
DTMF Digits: The number of digits sent for use with this routing method
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
86
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Wait (secs): The number of seconds that the board service waits for DTMF digits
before receiving the fax
AFR/DTMF: AFR is not a feature of TruFax boards. See “DTMF Routing” on
page 129.
Configure Channel Settings
To override the global settings for single channels, double-click the TruFax board
icon. Then select a channel icon. Settings typed here override the global setting
for the selected channel. Make any required changes to the channel settings.
If your board supports more channels than your license, be sure to disable
(remove the Enabled check from) the excess channels.
The TruFax board supports channel and DTMF routing of inbound faxes. See
“Board Server Service Configuration for Inbound Routing” on page 125 for setup
instructions.
Start the Board Service
1. While the board service name is selected in the tree view, click the Tools menu.
2. Click the Start Service option. Wait until the status bar indicates that the OTIS
Board Service is started.
3. Click the System icon in the tree view. TargetFax prompts you to save
changes. Click Yes.
4. Click OK, to stop and start the service.
Note: TargetFax checks the number of channels you enabled against the number
provided for in your license agreement, and notifies you if you have enabled too
many channels.
Configuring the Brooktrout 1034 Digital T1
Before you configure the 1034 Digital T1, review “T1 Provisioning” on page 29
of “Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation.” This section contains
specifications that your telephone service provider, or in-house phone system
technicians need for a T1 installation.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
87
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Configure the service for the 1034 Digital T1 as follows:
1. In the tree view, click FaxServer Services.
2. In the toolbar, click the
Install New FAX Service button to display the
Install New FAX Service box.
The Friendly ID is the name by which TargetFax identifies the service.
3. Type a Friendly ID (optional).
4. In the Server Type list box, select Brooktrout 1034, and click OK.
The Server Path is the Microsoft Windows Network ID computer name for this
server.
5. Click OK to accept (System Account) as the logon account for the board service.
In the example below, the board service FAX1, on computer TIM2003SVR, is
installed for Brooktrout-1034, using the System Account.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
88
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
The red dot, to the left of the board service name, indicates that the board service
is stopped.
6. To add the board, click the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
7. Click the Add New Board icon. You are prompted to select your board type.
8. Click your TR1034 Digital T1 board name, and then OK.
The 1 - TR1034 T1(PCI) appears below Fax Boards.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
89
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Configure Global Settings
The right section of the Board/Channel SetUp tab controls the board, and defines
communication settings for all channels.
Country: If you are installing to a server outside of the United States, select the
country where the server is located.
Use PRI: Configure for a PRI T1 installation as follows:
1. Click the Use PRI: box.
2. Click the Switch Type list box, and select your switch.
3. Click the Variant Type list box, and select your variant.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
90
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Module#: Select the rotary switch setting on the board. See “TR1034 Digital
Series for T1 Interface Environments” on page 25 of “Chapter -3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation” for an explanation of the rotary switch.
Global Channel Settings:
Leave the Enabled box checked. Based on your TargetFax usage, select the
appropriate communications setting:
• Broadcast users: Click Send.
• WorkFlow users: Click Recv.
• Mixed usage (Broadcast and WorkFlow): Make sure Both is checked.
AFR: See “Configuring AFR (Automatic Fax Removal)” on page 118, for AFR
installation instructions.
Global Board Settings:
CSID: The caller subscriber identification for all channels on the board
Digital/DID Settings: Set this box to the start mode your telco uses.
Dial Prefix: The numbers that precede the fax number, such as “9” for an outside
line
DID Digits: The number of routing digits the telco, PBX or CO provides
DTMF Digits: The number of digits sent for use with this routing method
Wait (secs): The number of seconds that the board service waits for DTMF digits
before receiving the fax
Configure Channel Settings
The Channel Settings perform the same functions as those described for the Global Channel Settings, but apply only to the selected channel. The Ext: box is
used for DID numbers, or the TargetFax extension of a channel. To set up inbound
routing by DID, DTMF or channels, see “Inbound Routing to AFR” on page 120.
To override the global settings for single channels, double-click the TR1034
T1(PCI) icon. Then select a channel icon. Make any required changes to the channel settings.
If your board supports more channels than your license, be sure to disable
(remove the Enabled check from) the excess channels.
Start the Board Service
1. While the board server name is selected in the tree view, click the Tools menu.
2. Click the Start Service option. Wait until the status bar indicates that the OTIS
Board Service is started.
3. Click the System icon in the tree view. TargetFax prompts you to save
changes. Click Yes.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
91
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
4. Click OK, to stop and start the service.
The new board service is displayed as a started service.
Note: TargetFax checks the number of channels you enabled against the number
provided for in your license agreement, and notifies you if you have enabled too
many channels.
Configuring the Brooktrout TR1034 Digital E1
Before you configure the TR1034 Digital E1, review “T1 Provisioning” on
page 55 of Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation. This section contains specifications that your telephone service provider, or in-house phone system technicians need for a T1 installation.
Configure the service for the 1034 Digital E1 as follows:
1. In the tree view, click FaxServer Services.
2. In the toolbar, click the
Install New FAX Service button to display the
Install New FAX Service box.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
92
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
The Friendly ID is the name by which TargetFax identifies the service.
3. Type a Friendly ID (optional).
4. In the Server Type list box, select Brooktrout 1034, and click OK.
The Server Path is the Microsoft Windows Network ID computer name for this
server.
5. Click OK to accept (System Account) as the logon account for the board service.
In the example below, the board service FAX1, on computer TIM2003SVR, is
installed for Brooktrout 1034, using the System Account.
The red dot, to the left of the board service name, indicates that the board service
is stopped.
6. To add the board, click the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
7. Click the Add New Board icon. You are prompted to select your board.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
93
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
8. Click a board name, ending with “E1,” that represents the number of channels
on your board. Then click OK.
Your choice of boards appears below Fax Boards.
Configure Global Settings
The right section of the Board/Channel SetUp tab controls the board, and defines
communication settings for all channels.
Country: If you are installing to a server outside of the United States, select the
country where the server is located.
Use PRI: This box is checked by default for some of the 1034E1 boards. These
boards only operate in PRI mode. Configure for a PRI T1 installation as follows:
1. If the Switch Type and Variant list boxes are not visible, click the Use PRI
box.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
94
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
2. Click the Switch Type list box, and select your switch.
3. Click the Variant list box, and select your variant.
Module#: Select the setting of the rotary switch on the board. See “Chapter - 3
Fax Board Preparation and Installation” for more information about the rotary
switch.
Global Channel Settings
Leave the Enabled box checked. Based on your TargetFax usage, select the
appropriate communications setting for the board.
• Broadcast users: Click Send.
• WorkFlow users: Click Recv.
• Mixed usage (Broadcast and WorkFlow): Make sure Both is checked.
Global Board Settings:
CSID: The caller subscriber identification for all channels on the board
Digital/DID Settings: Set this box to the start mode your telco uses.
Dial Prefix: The numbers that precede the fax number, such as “9” for an outside
line
DID Digits: The number of digits the telco, PBX or CO provides
DTMF Digits: The number of digits sent for use with this routing method
Wait (secs): The number of seconds that the board service waits for DTMF digits
before receiving the fax
Configure Channel Settings
The Channel Settings perform the same functions as those described for the Global Channel Settings, but apply only to the selected channel. The Ext: box is
used for the DID digits or TargetFax extension of a channel.To set up inbound
routing by DID, DTMF or channels, see “Inbound Routing to AFR” on page 120.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
95
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
To override the global settings for single channels, double-click the TR1034 icon.
Then select a channel icon. Make any required changes to the channel settings.
If your board supports more channels than your license, be sure to disable
(remove the Enabled check from) the excess channels.
Start the FaxServer Service
1. While the board service name is selected in the tree view, click the Tools menu.
2. Click the Start Service option. Wait until the status bar indicates that the OTIS
Board Service is started.
3. Click the System icon in the tree view. TargetFax prompts you to save changes.
Click Yes.
4. Click OK to stop and start the service.
The new board service is displayed as a started service.
Note: TargetFax checks the number of channels you enabled against the number
provided for in your license agreement, and notifies you if you have enabled too
many channels.
Configuring the Brooktrout 1034 Analog
Configure the service for the 1034 analog as follows:
1. In the tree view, click FaxServer Services.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
96
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
2. In the toolbar, click the
Install New FAX Service button to display the
Install New FAX Service box.
The Friendly ID is the name by which TargetFax identifies the service.
3. Type a Friendly ID (optional).
4. In the Server Type list box, select Brooktrout 1034, and click OK.
The Server Path is the Microsoft Windows Network ID computer name for this
server.
5. Click OK to accept (System Account) as the logon account for the board service.
In the example below, the board service FAX1, on computer TIM2003SVR, is
installed for Brooktrout 1034, using the System Account.
The red dot, to the left of the board service name, indicates that the board service
is stopped.
6. To add the board, click the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
97
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
7. Click the Add New Board icon. You are prompted to select your board.
8. The first three boards are analog. Click the board name that represents the
number of channels on your board. Then click OK.
Your choice of boards appears below Fax Boards.
Configure Global Settings
The right section of the Board/Channel SetUp tab controls the board, and defines
communication settings for all channels.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
98
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
If you are installing to a server outside of the United States, select the country
where the server is located.
Module#: Select the rotary switch setting on the board. See “Chapter - 3 Fax
Board Preparation and Installation” for more information about the rotary switch.
Global Channel Settings
Leave the Enabled box checked. Based on your TargetFax usage, select the
appropriate communications setting for the board.
• Broadcast users: Click Send.
• WorkFlow users: Click Recv.
• Mixed usage (Broadcast and WorkFlow): Make sure Both is checked.
AFR: This button appears on the Board/Channel SetUp tab of installations that
are licensed for “AFR” (Automatic Fax Removal). This feature lets people call the
TargetFax Server to add their fax numbers to the DoNotSend list. Please see
“Configuring AFR (Automatic Fax Removal)” on page 118.
Global Board Settings:
LSIPfx: Type the prefix to the fax numbers you will be dialing, such as “9” for an
outside line.
DTMF Digits: The number of digits sent for use with this routing method
Wait (secs): The number of seconds that the board service waits for DTMF digits
before receiving the fax
CSID: The caller subscriber identification for all channels on the board
Configure Channel Settings
The Channel Settings perform the same functions as those described for the Global Channel Settings, but apply only to the selected channel. The Ext: box is
used for the TargetFax extension of a channel. To set up inbound routing by DID,
DTMF or channels, see “Inbound Routing to AFR” on page 120.
To override the global settings for single channels, double-click the TR1034 icon.
Then select a channel icon. Make any required changes to channel settings.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
99
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Start the FaxServer Service
1. While the board service name is selected in the tree view, click the Tools menu.
2. Click the Start Service option. Wait until the status bar indicates that the OTIS
Board Service is started.
3. Click the System icon in the tree view. TargetFax prompts you to save
changes. Click Yes.
4. Click OK to stop and start the service.
The new board service is displayed as a started service.
Note: TargetFax checks the number of channels you enabled against the number
provided for in your license agreement, and notifies you if you have enabled too
many channels.
Configuring the Brooktrout TR114 Analog
Configure the service for the Brooktrout TR114 Analog as follows:
1. In the tree view, click FaxServer Services.
2. In the toolbar, click the
Install New FAX Service button to display the
Install New FAX Service box.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
100
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
The Friendly ID is the name by which TargetFax identifies the FaxServer.
3. Type a Friendly ID (optional).
4. In the Server Type list box, select Brooktrout-TR114, and click OK.
The Server Path is the Microsoft Windows Network ID computer name for this
server.
5. Click OK to accept (System Account) as the logon account for the board service.
In the example below, the board service FAX1, on computer TIM2003SVR, is
installed for Brooktrout, using the System Account.
The red dot, to the left of the board service name, indicates that the board service
is stopped.
6. To add the board, click the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
7. Click the Add New Board icon. You are prompted to select your board type.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
101
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
8. Click your TR114 board, and then OK.
The new TR114 appears below Fax Boards.
Global Board Settings
The right section of the Board/Channel SetUp tab controls the board, and defines
communication settings for all channels.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
102
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Country: If you are installing to a server outside of the United States, select the
country where the server is located.
Use Net Access Card: Click this box to install a Netaccess card. For Netaccess
installation instructions, see page 110.
Global Channel Settings
Leave the Enabled box checked. Based on your TargetFax usage, select the
appropriate communications setting:
• Broadcast users: Click Send.
• WorkFlow users: Click Recv.
• Mixed usage (Broadcast and WorkFlow): Make sure Both is checked.
AFR: This button appears on the Board/Channel SetUp tab of installations that
are licensed for “AFR” (Automatic Fax Removal). This feature lets people call the
TargetFax Server to add their fax numbers to the DoNotSend list. Please see
“Configuring AFR (Automatic Fax Removal)” on page 118.
Global Board Settings
LSIPfx: Type the prefix to the fax numbers you will be dialing, such as “9” for an
outside line.
DTMF Digits: The number of digits sent for use with this routing method
Wait (secs): The number of seconds that the board service waits for DTMF digits
before receiving the fax
CSID: The caller subscriber identification for all channels on the board
Configure Channel Settings
The Channel Settings perform the same functions as those described for the Global Channel Settings, but apply only to the selected channel. The Ext: box is
used for the TargetFax extension of a channel. To set up inbound routing by
DTMF or channel, see “Inbound Routing to AFR” on page 120.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
103
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
To override the global settings for single channels, double-click the TR114 icon.
Then select a channel icon. Make any required changes to the channel settings.
If your board supports more channels than your license, be sure to disable
(remove the Enabled check from) the excess channels.
Start the Board Service
1. While the board service name is selected in the tree view, click the Tools menu.
2. Click the Start Service option. Wait until the status bar indicates that the OTIS
Board Service is started.
3. Click the System icon in the tree view. TargetFax prompts you to save
changes. Click Yes.
4. Click OK to stop and start the service.
The new board service is displayed as a started service.
Note: TargetFax checks the number of channels you enabled against the number
provided for in your license agreement, and notifies you if you have enabled too
many channels.
Configuring the Brooktrout TR114 Digital T1
Before you configure the TR114 Digital T1, review “T1 Provisioning” on page 29
of “Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and Installation.” This section contains
specifications that your telephone service provider or in-house phone system technicians need for a T1 installation.
Install the board service for the Brooktrout TR114 Digital T1 as follows:
1. In the tree view, click FaxServer Services.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
104
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
2. In the toolbar, click the
Install New FAX Service button, to display the
Install New FAX Service box.
The Friendly ID is the name by which TargetFax identifies the FaxServer.
3. Type a Friendly ID (optional).
4. In the Server Type list box, select Brooktrout-TR114, and click OK.
The Server Path is the Microsoft Windows Network ID computer name for this
server.
5. Click OK to accept (System Account) as the logon account for the board service.
In the example below, the board service FAX1, on computer TIM2003SVR, is
installed for Brooktrout, using the local system account.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
105
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The red dot, to the left of the board service name, indicates that the board service
is stopped.
6. To add the board, click the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
7. Click the Add New Board icon. You are prompted to select your board type.
8. Click the T1 board with the correct number of channels, and then OK.
The TR114 T1 (PCI) appears below Fax Boards.
Configure Global Settings
The right section of the Board/Channel SetUp tab controls the board, and defines
communication settings for all channels.
Country: If you are installing to a server outside of the United States, select the
country where the server is located.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
106
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Use Net Access Card: Click this box to install a Netaccess card. For Netaccess
installation instructions, see page 110.
Global Channel Settings
Enabled: Leave the Enabled box checked. Based on your TargetFax usage, select
the appropriate communications setting:
• Broadcast users: Click Send.
• WorkFlow users: Click Recv.
• Mixed usage (Broadcast and WorkFlow): Make sure Both is checked.
AFR: This button appears on the Board/Channel SetUp tab of installations that
are licensed for “AFR” (Automatic Fax Removal). This feature lets people call the
TargetFax Server to add their fax numbers to the DoNotSend list. Please see
“Configuring AFR”, on page 118.
Global Board Settings
CSID: The caller subscriber identification for all channels on the board
Digital/DID Settings: Set this box to the start mode your telco uses.
Dial Prefix: The numbers that precede the fax number, such as “9” for an outside
line
DID Digits: The number of digits the telco, PBX or CO provides
DTMF Digits: The number of digits sent for use with this routing method
Wait (secs): The number of seconds that the board service waits for DTMF digits
before receiving the fax
Configure Channel Settings
The Channel Settings perform the same functions as those described for the Global Channel Settings, but apply only to the selected channel. The Ext: box is
used for the DID number or TargetFax extension of a channel. To set up inbound
routing by DID, DTMF or channel, see “Inbound Routing to AFR” on page 120.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
107
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
To override the global settings for single channels, double-click the TR114 T1
(PCI) icon. Then select a channel icon. Make any required changes to the channel
settings.
If your board supports more channels than your license, be sure to disable
(remove the Enabled check from) the excess channels.
Start the FaxServer Service
1. While the board service name is selected in the tree view, click the Tools menu.
2. Click the Start Service option. Wait until the status bar indicates that the OTIS
Board Service is started.
3. Click the System icon in the tree view. TargetFax prompts you to save
changes. Click Yes.
4. Click OK to stop and start the service.
The new board service is displayed as a started service.
Note: TargetFax checks the number of channels you enabled against the number
provided for in your license agreement, and notifies you if you have enabled too
many channels.
Set up the Netaccess Card
The addition of a Brooktrout Netaccess card enables a server with TR114 fax
board(s) to connect to PRI phone systems.
Before you can configure TargetFax for the TR114 fax board(s) and Netaccess
card, you must install Brooktrout’s Netaccess drivers. If you have previously
installed NetAccess drivers or board services, we recommend that you remove
these before proceeding. See “Uninstalling Netaccess Drivers” on page 302.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
108
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Install the Netaccess Drivers
Install the Netaccess drivers as follows:
1. If the ECC175.zip and naivdrv.sys files are on your TargetFax installation CD,
proceed to Step 3. Otherwise, you can download these at ftp://onetouchgt.com/
TFAX/NetAccess/. Call TargetFax Tech Support for FTP log on instructions.
2. On the TargetFax Server, extract the zip file to C:\Netaccess.
3. Double-click the Netaccess setup.exe file at C:\Netaccess\setup.exe, or on the
CD, to start the installation.
4. Click Next.
5. Clear the Install ECC API files box, leave Install Netaccess IRP Driver files
checked, and click Next.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
109
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
6. Click Yes, to accept the licensing agreement.
7. The Brooktrout drivers require less than 4mb of disk space. We recommend
that you click Next to install to C:\Bfax directory.
8. Click Finish to reboot.
The final steps update a driver that was not replaced by the installation program.
9. Rename naidrv.sys, at C:\Winnt\System32\drivers to naidrv.old.
10. Copy naidrv.sys from the C:\Netaccess directory to the
C:\Winnt\System32\drivers directory.
Configuring the Netaccess Card
The Board/Channel SetUp tab for TR114 Analog boards contains a Use Net
Access Card check box that installs a Netaccess card. Netaccess cards allow
TR114 analog boards to support T1-PRI and E1 phone circuits.
Configure the Netaccess card as follows:
1. Click a TR114 board server, in the tree view.
2. Click the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
3. Click Use Net Access Card. This displays the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
4. Click the Network Access Cards icon.
5. Click the Add New NetAccess Cards button.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
110
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
6. Select the card that is installed in the server, and click OK.
7. Click the Switch Type list box, and select your switch.
8. Click the Variant list box, and select your variant.
Installing Additional Boards
Many TargetFax installations require multiple Brooktrout fax boards to accommodate their broadcast and WorkFlow requirements. Two factors limit the type and
number of boards that one server can accommodate: TargetFax compatibility, and
the capacity of the server.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
111
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Server Capacity
The number of fax boards that you can install on a server is limited by:
• The number of available slots
• Available memory IO addresses for the boards
• The overall processing power of the server (memory, disk IO, processor
speed, etc.)
TargetFax Compatibility
All boards of the same Brooktrout series must be installed as part of the same FaxServer Service, as described below. If you have a TruFax board installed, another
TruFax board must be installed as part to the existing FaxServer Service. This
logic applies to the TR114 series and the TR1034 series. Cards from the same
series must be combined in a FaxServer Server.
To install a Brooktrout board of another series, create a new FaxServer Service as
described in “Configuring Board Services” on page 83.
Configure a second board of the same series as follows:
1. In Windows Services, view the Properties of the Otis Board Service (usually
Fax1).
2. Change the Startup Type to Manual.
3. Shut down the computer; insert the second board and start the computer.
4. If your server OS is NT or 2000, or you are installing a TR1034 on any server
OS, disallow plug and play installation, as described in “Disabling Brooktrout
Windows Device Drivers” on page 35. If you are installing a TruFax or TR114
board on Windows 2003, allow Windows to install the drivers for the detected
device.
5. Start the TargetFax System Administrator.
6. Click your FaxServer Service. This is usually Fax1.
7. Click the Board Channel Setup tab.
8. Click the Add New Board button; select the new board, and Click OK. The
second board appears in the Fax Server Setup for Fax1.
9. Configure the board, as previously described.
10. Save the changes and start the service, as described previously.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
112
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Configuring Dialogic Diva Boards
Before you configure an Dialogic Diva board for TargetFax, you must first install
the board in the computer, and install the Diva Server according to the instructions
provided in “Dialogic Diva Fax Boards” on page 64. Then you install the board
service for the Dialogic Diva board as follows:
1. In the tree view, click Fax Server Services.
2. In the toolbar, click the
Install New FAX Service button, to display the
Install New FAX Service box.
The Friendly ID is the name by which TargetFax identifies the FaxServer Service.
3. Type a Friendly ID (optional).
4. In the Server Type list box, select Eicon and click OK. This accepts (System
Account) as the logon account for the board service.
The Server Path is the Microsoft Windows Network ID computer name for this
server.
In the example below, the Fax1 board service, on computer TIM2003SVR, is
installed for Eicon, using the local system account.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
113
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The red dot, to the left of the board service name, indicates that the board service
is stopped.
5. Click the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
6. Click the Add New Board button.
7. From the Available Boards, click your fax board, and then click OK.
8. In the File menu, click the Save Server/Board/Channel Info command.
9. Click OK, to reconfigure the service.
This displays the default board and channel settings for the Diva Server.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
114
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Configure Board Settings
The right section of the Board/Channel SetUp tab controls the board, and defines
communication settings for all channels.
Board Settings
# of Chans: The number of channels detected on this board
Base Address: The I/O memory location for ISA boards
Note: Make sure your TargetFax license supports the number of channels indicated.
Global Channel Settings
Enabled: Leave the Enabled box checked. Based on your TargetFax usage, select
the appropriate communications setting:
• Broadcast users: Click Send.
• WorkFlow users: Click Recv.
• Mixed usage (Broadcast and WorkFlow): Make sure Both is checked.
AFR/DTMF: This button appears on the Board/Channel SetUp tab of installations that are licensed for “AFR” (Automatic Fax Removal). This feature lets people call the TargetFax Server to add their fax numbers to the DoNotSend list.
Please see “Configuring AFR”, on page 118.
Global Board Settings
CSID: The caller subscriber identification for all channels on the board
DTMF Digits: The number of digits sent for use with this routing method
Wait (secs): The number of seconds that the Diva Server waits for DTMF digits
before receiving the fax
Digital/DID Settings: Set this box to the start mode your telco uses.
Dial Prefix: The numbers that precede the fax number, such as “9,” for an outside
line
DID Digits: The number of digits the telco, PBX or CO provides
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
115
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Channel Settings
The Channel Settings perform the same functions as those described for the Global Channel Settings, but apply only to the selected channel. The Ext: box is
used for the DID numbers or TargetFax extension of a channel.To set up inbound
routing by DID, DTMF or channel, see “Board Server Service Configuration for
Inbound Routing” on page 125.
1. Double-click the Diva Server to display the channel icons.
2. Double-click a channel icon. The settings for the selected channel appear.
Start the FaxServer Service
1. While the board service name is selected in the tree view, click the Tools menu.
2. Click the Start Service option. Wait until the status bar indicates that the OTIS
Board Service is started.
3. Click the System icon in the tree view. TargetFax prompts you to save
changes. Click Yes.
4. Click OK to stop and start the service.
The Eicon Diva is displayed as a started service.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
116
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Note: TargetFax checks the number of channels you enabled against the number
provided for in your license agreement, and notifies you if you have enabled too
many channels.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
117
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Configuring AFR (Automatic Fax Removal)
Dialogic Diva fax boards, and the Dialogic Brooktrout TR114 and TR1034 series
boards support the TargetFax Automated Fax Removal feature on systems that are
licensed for this capability.
Fax broadcast documents can include a phone number that fax recipients may use
to call your TargetFax system, to add their fax numbers to a list of fax numbers to
which TargetFax will not send faxes. This list is called the DoNotSend (DNS)
database.
When callers dial the TargetFax AFR Module, they hear instructions for adding
fax numbers to the DNS list. You manage the DNS database with the TargetFax
Broadcast Manager. See “Chapter - 9 TargetFax Broadcast Manager” for an explanation of this feature.
You can install the fax board that receives DNS calls on the TargetFax Server, or
on a second Windows server. A second AFR server can process DNS calls regardless of the operational state of the TargetFax Server. It is imperative that the TargetFax Server and the AFR server be joined to the same domain.
TargetFax provides two methods by which you can route calls to AFR:
• Routing by channel on analog boards
• Routing by DID on digital boards
Before you configure the AFR receive channel(s), make certain that you are
licensed to use AFR, and have activated your license.
Installing a Fax Board for TargetFax AFR
Install the fax board as described in “Chapter - 3 Fax Board Preparation and
Installation” on page 47.
If you installed the fax board in the TargetFax Server, configure the FaxServer
Service for this board as described in “Configuring Board Services” on page 83.
If you installed the fax board on another server, install the TargetFax Client on this
server, as described in “” on page 125. Then start the System Administrator and
add the FaxServer Service for this board as described in “Configuring Board Services” on page 83.
Next, you set up a digital fax board to receive DNS calls as described in “Digital
Routing to AFR” on page 120, or set up an analog fax board to receive DNS calls
as described in “Routing from Analog Boards to AFR” on page 120.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
118
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Windows 2003 Installation of TR114 Series Boards and TargetFax AFR
These instructions are only for customers who are using the Windows 2003
Server, have purchased TargetFax AFR (Automatic Fax Removal) and are using
TR114 series fax boards. The Windows 2003 Plug and Play Brooktrout drivers do
not support AFR. Before you can enable AFR, you must remove the Windows
2003 Brooktrout Plug and Play drivers. Then you install the TargetFax TR114
drivers as described below.
This installation procedure requires you to perform a Plug and Play installation,
install TargetFax, remove and then replace the drivers as follows:
1. Install the TR114 board, and then start the computer.
Windows 2003 Plug and Play automatically detects the board, and installs the
drivers without prompting. Unlike Windows 2000, there is no driver selection
option.
2. Install the TargetFax Server and Client as described in “Chapter - 4 Installing
TargetFax Software to the Server” on page 41. When the installer starts the
License Manager, proceed to step 3 below.
3. Open a command prompt window.
4. Make C:\TargetFax\Install\Bfax\Install your current directory.
5. Type Install –r. This removes the Plug and Play driver configuration
options from the Registry.
6. Close the command prompt window.
7. Shutdown Windows 2003, and remove the TR114 board from the computer.
8. Restart Windows 2003.
9. Check the Device Manager to verify that the board is removed from the system. If you see the Brooktrout board, right-click the device, and then select
Uninstall.
10. Open a command prompt window.
11. Make C:\TargetFax\Install\Bfax\Install your current directory, and type Install.
12. Respond to all prompts by pressing the Enter key.
13. While still at the command prompt, type Net Start Bfax. This starts the
required Bfax Board Server driver for TargetFax. It also prevents the Plug and
Play driver from reinstalling.
14. Shutdown the server, and reinstall the board.
15. Start 2003 server.
The Plug and Play manager will inform you that a PCI device has been detected,
and the Wizard will commence. This is normal; just let it continue. Eventually it
will notify you that the wizard has failed. These expected results confirm that the
Windows 2003 Plug and Play driver cannot be reinstalled.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
119
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Inbound Routing to AFR
Set up AFR on you digital or Analog fax board as described.
Routing from Analog Boards to AFR
Configure analog routing as follows:
1. Start the TargetFax System Administrator.
2. In the tree view, click the icon of the board server that will receive AFR calls.
3. Click the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
4. Expand the board icon to display the channels.
5. Make sure that you have channels available for AFR. If the board has more
channels than your TargetFax license supports, disable the excess channels by
clicking a channel and removing the Enabled check from the Channel Settings box.
6. To select a channel that will receive AFR phone calls, click an enabled (green)
channel.
7. Click the Recv or Both button in the Channel Settings.
Note: We strongly recommend that you set at least one AFR receiving channel to
Recv. This improves the probability that a channel will be available to receive a
call.
8. Click the AFR/DTMF button, to display the Global Channel Options.
9. In AFR Channels, type the channel numbers allocated to receive DNS calls,
separated by comas.e.g. 1,2,3.
10. Click OK.
Digital Routing to AFR
Configure routing to AFR by DID as follows:
1. Start the TargetFax System Administrator.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
120
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
2. In the tree view, click the icon of the board server that will receive AFR calls.
3. Click the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
4. Expand the board icon to display the channels.
5. Make sure that you have channels available for AFR. If the board has more
channels than your TargetFax license supports, disable the excess channels by
clicking a channel, and removing the Enabled check from the Channel Settings box.
6. To select a channel that will receive AFR phone calls, click an enabled (green)
channel.
7. Click the Recv or Both button in the Channel Settings.
Note: We strongly recommend that you set at least one AFR receiving channel to
Recv. This improves the probability that a channel will be available to receive a
call.
8. Click the AFR/DTMF button, to display the Global Channel Options.
9. In AFR Channels, type the DID number(s) that will receive AFR calls. Separate multiple numbers with commas. Click OK.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
121
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Board Service Field Descriptions
Server Setup Tab
Friendly ID
The TargetFax name for this Windows service. Windows uses
a different identifier for the service.
#
The identification number of the service. TargetFax automatically allocates this number. This is a read-only field.
Type
This refers to the type of board service: Brooktrout 114, Dialogic Brooktrout 1034 or Dialogic Diva.
Server Path
The Microsoft Windows Network ID computer name for this
server.
Default User
This box is not related to the board service. This is the default
logon account that TargetFax uses to connect to a RightFax
server.
Send Chans
The number of channels assigned to only send, as defined in
the Global Channel and Channel Settings of the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
Recv
The number of channels assigned to only receive, as defined in
the Global Channel and Channel Settings of the Board/Channel SetUp tab.
Both
The number of channels assigned to send and receive, as
defined in the Global Channel and Channel Settings of the
Board/Channel SetUp tab.
InUse
The number of channels defined as enabled in the Global
Channel and Channel Settings of the Board/Channel SetUp
tab. These channels could be set to send, receive or both.
Max
The number of channels the Brooktrout card supports. This
may be a larger number than your license supports.
Normal Load
The number of normal queue events sent to the server for processing.
Max Load
The number of priority queue events sent to the server for processing.
Load Sync
Method
The value of this list box is always None. Board services
require no Load Sync Method.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
122
Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services
Debugging
When this box is checked, TargetFax writes a log of board
level activity to C:\OTLocal\logs\[Faxservername]d.log.
Check this box only if you are instructed to do so by TargetFax
Technical Support.
Call Grouping
When you check this box, the board service checks the next
fax in the queue to see if it goes to the same fax number as the
fax that is currently sending. If it finds this match, it sends the
next fax in the same transmission as the previous fax. This
eliminates the chance of a busy fax line for the later transmission.
TargetFax records each message sent in this way as a separate
fax transmission.
Retries Errors
This is enabled by default. When enabled, the board service
responds to a failed transmission according to the rules set up
in the System Administrator Error/Retries Rules tab. If you
remove this check, failed transmissions are not resent.
Board/ChannelSetUp Tab
.
Use Network
Access Cards
(TR114 fax
boards only)
When this box is checked, the Board/Channel SetUp tree
view lists all the Netaccess cards installed for use by this board
service.
Fax Boards
This leaf in the Board/Channel SetUp tree view lists the fax
boards used by the board service.
United States
(List Box)
Identifies the Country where the board service is running. This
establishes the parameters for accessing the phone system.
To learn how to add Netaccess cards, see “Copy naidrv.sys
from the C:\Netaccess directory to the
C:\Winnt\System32\drivers directory.” on page 110.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
123
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Global Channel Settings
Defines channel settings for all channels of the fax board. The
Global settings display when a fax board is selected in the tree
view of the Board/Channel SetUp tab. The settings are:
Enabled: Sets all channels to be available for use
None: All channels neither send nor receive.
Recv: All channels only receive.
Send: All channels only send.
Both: All channels can receive or send.
If your license includes AFR, you click the AFR button to
specify the DID codes or phone extensions that will receive
calls. When set at the global level, these DID codes and phone
extensions apply to all channels of the board. See “Configuring
AFR (Automatic Fax Removal)” on page 118 for a complete
explanation of AFR.
Channels Settings
Defines channel settings for a single channel of the fax board.
The Channel settings display when a channel is selected in the
tree view of the Board/Channel SetUp tab. The settings are
are the same as those provided at the Global level, and perform
the same function for a single channel.
The None setting is used at the channel level for enabled channels that are not connected to a phone line.
The Ext: box is used for a DID or custom TargetFax extension
for a channel.
CSID: The caller subscriber identification number of the
device that sends to this channel.
AFR: If your license includes AFR, you click the AFR button
to specify the DID codes or phone extensions that will receive
calls on one channel. See “Configuring AFR (Automatic Fax
Removal)” on page 118 for a complete explanation of AFR
Global Board
Settings
CSID: The caller subscriber information for any channel not
set at the channel level.
Digital/DID Settings: The value of your T1 signal protocol
DID Digits: The direct inward dial numbers
Dial Prefix: The numbers that precede the fax number
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
124
Chapter - 6 Installing the TargetFax Client Applications to Workstations and Terminal Server
This chapter explains how to install the TargetFax Submit and Fax
Manager applications on the Terminal Services server. It also
explains how to install the TargetFax Client applications to any Window 2000®, XP Professional® or Vista® workstation with a network
connection to the TargetFax Server.
The TargetFax Client programs (Submit and Fax Manager) create,
manage, send and receive faxes. For usage instructions, please refer
to “Chapter 1 The TargetFax Client,” of the TargetFax User Guide.
This is the only TargetFax product that can be installed for use from
Terminal Services.
The Broadcast Manager creates and manages fax broadcast jobs.
The Broadcast Manager can be installed on the TargetFax Server and
workstations. For usage instructions please refer to “Chapter -3 TargetFax Broadcast Manager” of the TargetFax User Guide.
Mail Merge is a feature of TargetFax Submit. Submit must be
installed and licensed to enable mail merge functions. For usage
instructions, please refer to “Chapter - 2 TargetFax Mail Merge” of
the TargetFax User Guide.
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The System Administrator program enables remote administration of the TargetFax Server. This application can be installed on the TargetFax Server and workstations. Install this program only on the desktops of TargetFax Administrators. Only
Administrators should be given the TargetFax permissions required to start this
program.
Important: Do not install the Client applications until after you have configured
the TargetFax Server, as described in “Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board
Services” on page 79.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
126
C h a p t e r - 6 I n s t a l l i n g t h e Ta r g e t F a x C l i e n t A p p l i c a t i o n s t o W o r k s t a t i o n s a n d Te r m i n a l S e r v e r
Install the TargetFax Client, Broadcast Manager, Mail Merge and
System Administrator
Window 2003 Installations
If you are using Windows Server 2003, set directory permissions, as shown below,
before continuing with Client installation.
To set user/group permissions:
1. Create a domain local scope group to which you add all TargetFax users.
2. Set C:\Targetfax to be shared.
3. Display the Properties for C:\Targetfax.
4. Make sure Permissions are set to Full Control in the Sharing tab.
5. Click the Security tab, and grant Full Control permissions to the users/groups
who will operate TargetFax.
6. For each group or user, click the Advanced button, and make sure the check
box for Allow inheritable permissions from the parent to propagate to this
object and all child objects. Include these with entries explicitly defined is
checked.
7. On the server’s C:\OTLocal directory, make sure that TargetFax users have
Full Control, and that Allow inheritable permissions from the parent to
propagate to this object and all child objects. Include these with entries
explicitly defined is checked.
Note: After completing a successful TargetFax installation and testing the system,
you may experiment with applying your security policies. Keep track of the
changes you make to the C:\Targetfax or C:\OTLocal directories. This
will help you roll back to a functioning system.
Installing the TargetFax Client for Terminal Services
For workstation installation instructions see “Installing the Client Applications on
a Workstation” on page 130.
After installing TargetFax on the server, install the TargetFax Client applications
as follows:
1. Log on to the Terminal Server computer with the network ID of a user with
administrative permissions.
2. Close all programs.
The TargetFax installer copied the Client installation program (CLIENT.EXE) to
\\server\targetfax\install, where “server” is the computer name of
your TargetFax Server.
3. Browse to the \\server\targetfax\install directory, and doubleclick CLIENT.EXE.
4. Click Next, to install the Client applications.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
127
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
5. Click Next, to select the C:\OTLocal directory.
Important: Do not install TargetFax to the Program Files directory, or any other
directory that has a space in the directory name.
6. Click Install, to continue the installation.
After the files are copied, the install program assists you with creating a user profile for sending and receiving faxes.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
128
C h a p t e r - 6 I n s t a l l i n g t h e Ta r g e t F a x C l i e n t A p p l i c a t i o n s t o W o r k s t a t i o n s a n d Te r m i n a l S e r v e r
7. Type the user information for a user at this workstation:
User Mailbox: This is the user name under which faxes are listed in the Fax Manager. The Installation program detects the network ID of the current user. Type the
user name of a TargetFax Terminal Services user.
FromName: The name of this TargetFax user. This sender’s name appears on
faxes.
FromPhone: Type the sender’s phone number.
FromFaxNum: Type the sender’s fax number.
8. Make sure that the Submit/Client, Fax Printer Driver and Use Roaming
Profile boxes are checked.
9. Clear the check marks from all the other Resources/Applications. These products cannot be installed to Terminal Services. Then click OK.
10. Leave only the first (Load TargetFax Tray Icon on exit) Installation Complete option checked, and click Finish.
The TargetFax icon appears in the system tray.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
129
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Print Driver Installation
The print-to-Fax driver you installed in Chapter Three only enables print-to-fax
capabilities to users working at the TargetFax Server console. Follow these steps
to enable print-to-fax operation for Terminal Services users:
1. While logged on to the Terminal Services server, display the \\TargetFax\install directory on the TargetFax Server.
2. Double-click Print.Drve.exe to display the Welcome screen.
3. Click Next, and then the Custom button.
4. Install TargetFax Print Driver should be checked. Click InstallRDP/Citrix
Driver/Ports and click Next, to complete the print driver for RDP installation.
Create Users
When a user tries to start TargetFax, TargetFax verifies that the user’s network
logon ID belongs to a TargetFax user before the program starts.You must therefore
add users, in the System Administrator, before they can start TargetFax. See “User
Administration” on page 30.
Installing the Client Applications on a Workstation
Note: If you install the Client applications while logged on as an Administrator,
you will need create a TargetFax user account for the user of this workstation.
Install the TargetFax Client applications as follows:
1. Log on to a workstation with the network ID of the TargetFax user you will
create. This user must also have local machine administrative permissions.
2. Close all Windows programs.
The TargetFax installer copied the Client installation program (CLIENT.EXE) to
\\server\targetfax\install, where “server” is the name of your TargetFax Server.
3. Browse to the \\server\targetfax\install directory, and doubleclick CLIENT.EXE.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
130
C h a p t e r - 6 I n s t a l l i n g t h e Ta r g e t F a x C l i e n t A p p l i c a t i o n s t o W o r k s t a t i o n s a n d Te r m i n a l S e r v e r
4. Click Next, to install the Client applications.
5. Click Next, to select the C:\OTLocal directory.
Important: Do not install TargetFax to the Program Files directory, or any other
directory that has a space in the directory name.
6. Click Install, to continue the installation.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
131
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
After the files are copied, the install program assists you with creating a user profile for sending and receiving faxes.
7. Type the user information for a TargetFax user:
User Mailbox: The Installation program detects the network ID of the current
user. This is also the user name under which received faxes are listed in the Fax
Manager. You can change this to another Windows logon ID.
FromName: The sender’s name, which appears on faxes. You can change this if
you like.
FromPhone: Type the sender’s phone number.
FromFaxNum: Type the sender’s fax number.
The TargetFax Client and Administrative Tools applications are checked for
installation by default. Only install the Administrative Tools on computers used
by TargetFax Administrators.
8. Make sure the Resources/Applications boxes for your purchased applications
are checked, and click OK.
9. Leave only the first option, Load TargetFax Tray icon on Exit, of the Installation Complete box, checked, and click Finish.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
132
C h a p t e r - 6 I n s t a l l i n g t h e Ta r g e t F a x C l i e n t A p p l i c a t i o n s t o W o r k s t a t i o n s a n d Te r m i n a l S e r v e r
The TargetFax Client installation is complete. The TargetFax icon appears in the
system tray.
Note: If you installed the Client applications while logged on as an administrator,
you did not create a TargetFax user account during the installation. You must
therefore create an account for the user of this workstation, as explained in “User
Administration” on page 30.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
133
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
134
Chapter - 7 TargetFax for WorkFlow
This chapter explains how the TargetFax inbound routing WorkFlow
receives and delivers faxes in single and multi-page TIFF, and single
page PDF formats. It also explains how TargetFax for WorkFlow
routes faxes to the following destinations:
•
•
•
•
E-mail distribution lists
TargetFax user’s e-mail addresses
Printers
Network directories, in TIFF or PDF format, with customized
file names
• FTP Servers
• Document imaging systems
• Document management systems
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Default Inbound Workflow
This section provides procedures for routing faxes to printers, directories and email addresses. Before you can route faxes to e-mail addresses, you must configure the TargetFax Mail Connector, and apply the license key for this service. "The
TargetFax Mail Connector" on page 172.
Default Routing Instructions
TargetFax routes faxes received without routing information, such as DID numbers, to the destinations selected in the User Profile of the default TargetFax
receiver. The name of the current default receiver is defined in the TargetFax System Adminstrator. View and change the default receiver as follows:
1. Start the TargetFax System Administrator.
2. Click the Users icon, in the tree view.
3. To change the default receiver, click the Default Receiver ellipsis, and select
or create another default receiver.
4. In the File menu, click the Save Users Class Info command. See "User
Administration" on page 30.
Setup Default Inbound Routing to a Printer
See “Full List ToolBar Icon” and “Set up the Default User Account” in “Chapter 1 The TargetFax Client” of the TargetFax User Guide, for an explanation of the
TargetFax Client features used below.
Route inbound faxes to the default printer as follows:
1. Start the TargetFax System Administrator.
2. Click the Users ellipsis, in the tree view.
3. Click the User Profiles button, to display the Edit User Information.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
136
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
4. Click the More button, to display the rest of this box.
5. In the PrinterName list box, click a printer.
6. Click the In Routing ellipsis, to display the User Routing Options.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
137
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
7. Click Print to User’s Printer, and then OK.
8. In the User Profile, click the PrinterName down-arrow and select the printer
for faxes.
9. Click OK twice.
Note: If you select the printer from a workstation, the printer name must match
the printer name as seen from the TargetFax Server.
Set Up Default Inbound Routing to a Directory
By default, TargetFax receives and saves faxes without routing numbers as multipage TIFF files that it copies to C:\Targetfax\users\user_name, where
user_name is the default receiver of the fax. You can view these faxes, in the
Fax Manager, as Received Events for this user.
By using the Inbound Routing Copy to options you can also save these faxes as
multi-page TIFF, single-page TIFF or PDF files. The default directory to which
files are saved is different for each file type.
• Copy to Multi-Page PDF copies to C:\extPDF
• Copy to Single Page TIFF copies to C:\extstif
• Copy to Multi-Page TIFF copies to C:\exttif
The file name includes the unique FaxKey number that is assigned to each
received fax.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
138
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
See "WorkServer Inbound Routing Defaults" on page 44, for instruction in changing these default settings.
Specify the file format(s) in which faxes are saved as follows:
1. Start the System Administrator.
2. In the tree view, click the User icon. Take note of which user name appears in
the Default Receiver box.
3. Click the User Profiles, to display the user list.
4. Double-click the default receiver, to display the User Information.
5. Click the More button, to view the rest of this box.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
139
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
6. Click the In Routing ellipsis, to display the Inbound Routing Options.
7. Click one or more of the Copy to options:
• Copy to Multi-Page PDF - Converts the fax to an Adobe Portable Document File before saving a copy to disk
• Copy to Single Page TIFF - Saves each page of the fax as a separate TIFF
file
• Copy to Multi-Page TIFF - Saves the fax as a single TIFF file
Selecting the Directory to which Files Are Saved
TargetFax provides two techniques for selecting the directories to which inbound
faxes are saved: the Directory setting, in User Profiles, and custom paths.
The Directory setting also controls the location to which files are directed with
the Copy to Document Management System option. If you are using this feature, see "Copy to Document Management System" on page 149.
To change the Directory setting, open the User Profile of the Default Receiver,
and type a directory name. If the directory does not exist, TargetFax creates the
directory before it writes files to these directories.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
140
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
The value of Directory will now be added to the default path for saving files. If,
as in the example above, Directory was set to Inbound, files would be saved to
the following locations:
Copy to Multi-Page PDF C:\extPDF\Inbound\
Copy to Single Page TIFF C:\extstif\Inbound\
Copy to Multi-Page TIFF C:\exttif\Inbound\
FaxKey is a file name that comes from the unique FaxKey number that is
assigned to each received fax.
You can also type a root directory, such as D:\inbound or \\inbound.This
causes all faxes received by this user to be saved to the specified root directory.
Saving to Custom Paths
To save each format to a directory you specify, follow these steps:
1. Click the In Routing ellipsis.
2. Check the “Copy to” box for the file format(s) in which you want to save files.
3. Check the Use Custom Path check box for the file format(s) you selected. e.g.
Use Custom PDFPath.
4. Click the ellipsis for the custom path, to display the File Path/Type/Procedure
settings.
5. Click the File Path ellipsis, and navigate to the directory where the faxes will
be saved.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
141
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
6. Windows does not allow you to select a directory; it wants a file name. You can
work around this problem by typing a character in the File Name box, as
shown below, and then click the Open button.
7. Erase the character at the end of the File Path, and click the OK button.
The directory path appears in the Inbound Routing Options.
8. Click OK three times.
To override the default file type, click the File Type ellipsis and select another file
format for the saved file.
Routing Instruction(s)
Destination of Received Faxes
The Inbound Routing Copy To option
is checked
Fax is saved to the directory defined in the
WorksServer Inbound Routing Defaults e.g. C:\extPDF. File is named after faxkey.
The Inbound Routing Copy To option
is checked and a Directory
e.g. faxfolder, entry appears in the
User Profile
Fax is saved to the directory defined in the
WorksServer Inbound Routing Defaults, followed by
the Directory entry e.g. C:\extPDF\faxfolder. File is
named after faxkey.
The Inbound Routing Copy To option
is checked and the Directory entry
that appears in the User Profile is a
root directory e.g. C:\Faxfolder
Fax is saved to the root directory specified in the User
Profile (C:\Faxfolder). File is named after faxkey.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
142
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
The Inbound Routing Copy To and
Use Custom options are checked
and a directory name and file name
parameters appear in the Use Custom box.
Fax is saved to the directory displayed in the Use Custom box and named according to the naming parameters.
Copy to Custom File Names
When routing to custom paths, TargetFax does not name the file with its faxkey
value. You must create a file name by including one or more of the field parameters, listed below, at the end of the File Path value.
For example, with a directory path of \\machine name\$D$t, TargetFax creates a uniquely named file that combines a 4 digit date stamp
(yyyymmdd) and 6 digit time stamp (hhmmss) every time a file is saved.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
143
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
File and Directory Naming Parameters
$U
User name of the logged on user
$u
The name of the Ini file used by the application (e.g. Broadcast
Manager, Client or System Administrator) or Service
$N
The last three characters of $u
$n
The first three characters of $U
$R
The C:\TargetFax directory. When no directory is specified,
faxes are routed to this directory.
$D
DateStamp formatted yyyymmdd, e.g. 20030215
$Y
The current 4 digit year
$y
The current 2 digit year
$m
The current 2 digit month
$d
The current 2 digit day
$t
6 digit time stamp formatted: hhmmss
$h
The current 2 digit hour
$M
The current 2 digit minute
<FromName>
Name from CoverPage (from User Profile or override)
<FromPhone>
PhoneNum from CoverPage (from User Profile or override)
<FromFaxNum>
Received sender name (if any)
<FaxMode>
Fine (default) or Standard
<UniqueID>
Unique identifier given to FaxServer to reference a fax
<Event>
Event number returned by FaxServer
<TotalPages>
Total number of pages transmitted (including cover)
<SplitFirst>
The page number within a multi-document transmission of the
page where a document split begins
<SplitLast>
The page number within a multi-document transmission of the
page where a document split ends
<SplitPages>
The total number of pages in a split document
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
144
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
<CSID>
CSID returned by receiving fax (if any)
<ServerName>
TargetFax database name
<Channel>
Receiving channel on server
<Duration>
Duration of call
<CSID>
CSID returned by receiving fax (if any)
<other>
Any field in the document control file, including custom fields,
can be used. For instance, you can create a value name, and
then put a value into it. This may be useful, for instance, if you
receive a fax from a certain CSID, or DID, and want to create a
new field name with a value (e.g. if you get a fax from
CSID=555-1212, then Facility=ACME Widgets. Therefore,
your embedded field name for routing would be <Facility>).
Literals
Literal characters may also be used. However, the following
characters are reserved, and must not be used: ` ~ \ /. < >
Default Inbound Routing to an E-mail Address
The TargetFax Mail Connector sends e-mail notification of received faxes via
SMTP. By default, the text of the notification comes from the “Notify” cover page
topic. Fax attachments can be sent as e-mail attachments converted to multi-page
TIFF or PDF attachments as follows:
1. Install the TargetFax Mail Connector as described on page 172.
2. Start the System Administrator.
3. In the tree view, click the Users icon.
4. Click the User Profiles button to display the user profiles. Click the account of
the Default Receiver.
5. Click the Edit button to display the Edit User Information.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
145
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
6. Click the More button, to display the rest of this box.
7. Click the In Routing ellipsis, to display the Inbound Routing Options.
8. Check Forward to User’s MailTo.
9. To include the content of the fax, as an attachment, check Include Attachment. This attaches the fax to the e-mail message as a multi-page TIFF file. To
send the attachment in PDF format, check Convert TIFFs to PDF.
10. By default, TargetFax sends the “Notify” cover page topic to inform users of
received faxes (see "Users Class Notifications" on page 42). To change to
another topic, check Custom MailTopic box, click the corresponding ellipsis
and select, or create the topic to include.
11. Click the Forward to User’s MailTo ellipsis. The All Recipients view displays TargetFax Users and external Recipients.
12. Double-click the users or recipients to whom you will forward faxes.
13. Click OK four times.
The Routing Options below send e-mail to user Horace Hottentot. The fax will be
converted to PDF format and attached to an e-mail message which will consist of
the text from the CONFIRMRECV topic.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
146
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
147
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Barcode/ImagingProcessing Splitting
Use this group of options to select a document profile and/or WorkFlow buttons
used to review faxes received by this user and to specify the user who reviews
faxes received by a user.
Use DocProfile: When this box is checked, documents received by this user are
processed using the actions of the document profile you select or create after
clicking the Use DocProfile ellipsis ("Document Profiles" on page 209.). Faxes
requiring typed entry of meta data, Images with bar codes, and those that require
repair, are examples of faxes processed by Document Profiles.
Use WorkFlow: Check this box, then click the Use WorkFlow ellipsis and select
or create WorkFlow buttons required for TargetFax Router processing of this
user’s received faxes.
Pause for Reviewer: When this box is checked, the Fax Manager and Fax Manager pane of the Router display documents received by this user when the events
are filtered for To Review Events. By default any user with the right to see the
event can review it. To specify the only user who can change the status of a document to “Reviewed,” click the Pause for Reviewer ellipsis, and select or create
that user. In addition to the user specified here, users with the Specific Right to
Run System Administrator can also review faxes and mark the fax status as
“Reviewed.”
Hold Remaining Actions: When checked, the routing options below this option
do not execute until the Router user who reviews this fax executes a Complete(ReviewStatus) action to resume processing. This enables users to review a
document before it is saved, forwarded, printed, etc. by the remaining routing
options.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
148
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
More Inbound Routing Options
Overlay File Name on Image
The default file name is the FaxKey value assigned to the TIFF image of the fax.
You can superimpose this overlay, or a custom file name, on received faxes, as
follows:
1. In the User Routing Options, check the Overlay Filename on Image box.
Click OK to overlay the FaxKey.
2. To specify your own overlay file, check the Use Custom Overlay box and
click the corresponding ellipsis.
3. Select or add an overlay form, and then click OK.
When the faxes received by this user are printed or viewed, the file name will
appear as a water mark on the page. For more information on Overlays, see
“Chapter -5 Overlay Fields?,” of the TargetFax User Guide.
Forward to Other User(s):
This option sends the received fax to the Received Events of selected users. Forward faxes as follows:
1. Check the Forward to Other User(s) box and click the corresponding ellipsis to
to display a user list.
2. Select or create a user.
3. Double-click the this user to add it to the Selected Receivers list.
4. Repeat steps two and three for each additional receiver to whom faxes will be
forwarded.
5. Click the OK button.
Copy to Document Management System
When checked, this inboard routing option copies faxes received by this user to
the following directory and file name:
C:\TargetFax\Extdig\Reg\<USER>$m$d$y$h$M
The file name will be the name of the user whose User Profile <USER> you are
editing, followed by the current two digit month, two digit date, two digit year,
and two digit hour and minute when the file was written to disk. This creates a
unique directory name that will not be overwritten by the next saved file.
To change the location and file name, proceed as follows:
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
149
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
1. In the User Profile of the user who receives the fax, click the In Routing button, to display the Routing Options.
2. To copy to the default directory (C:\EXTDIG), check the Copy to Document
Management System box and then OK.
3. To copy to a different directory, check the Use Custom DIGPath check box,
and click the corresponding ellipsis.
4. Click the File Path ellipsis.
5. In the File Name box, type<faxkey>and click Open. The file name for files
copied to this directory will now be the unique faxkey identifier. "File and
Directory Naming Parameters" on page 144 for more naming techniques.
6. Click the File Type ellipsis and select the file format.
The Proc (opt), ellipsis triggers the execution of custom rules that act upon the
files copied to the default or custom location. Call TargetFax Professional Services for assistance with advanced inbound routing.
7. Click OK four times to exit user options.
Forward to User’s FaxTo
This feature sends faxes through phone lines to anyone to whom you wish to send,
while the Forward to Other User(s) option places a copy of a fax in the Received
events of TargetFax users.
To send faxes received by this user to another user, recipient, list or group, check
the F box, click the corresponding ellipsis and select the recipient(s). A custom
fax topic, to be sent with the fax is optional.
If you would like to send notification that a fax was received, without forwarding
the fax, leave the recipient blank, select a topic and type a colon (:) after the topic,
as shown below.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
150
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
FaxServer Service Configuration for Inbound Routing
The fax board and FaxServer Service captures routing information sent with
inbound faxes, and uses this information to direct the faxes to a printer, directories, e-mail addresses, and other destinations listed in this chapter. This redirection
of faxes from the default receiver to another user is configured in the User Profile
that contains the received routing number.
Before you can route faxes to TargetFax user accounts, your System Administrator license must include WorkFlow capabilities.
In the sample screens above, the DID value of 4567 indicates that a fax sent to a
fax number ending with “4567” will be routed according to instructions in this
User Profile. In the Inbound Routing Options for this user, Print to User’s
Printer is checked. The destination printer is selected in PrinterName, of the
User Profile. This is a sample of how an output destination is linked to routing
numbers in the User Profile.
This section describes how to configure either DID/DNIS, Channel or DTMF
routing on Brooktrout and Eicon fax boards.
The TargetFax System Administrator Board/Channel SetUp tab controls
inbound routing on the server. The Board/Channel SetUp tab is visible when a
Board Service is selected, in the tree view.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
151
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
If there are no FaxServer Services visible in your tree view, "Chapter - 5 Add the
WorkServer and Board Services" on page 55 for Board Service installation
instructions.
Refer to the table below to determine the inbound routing options available on
your fax board.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
152
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
DID/DNIS
DTMF
Channel
CSID
Brooktrout
TruFax
Brooktrout 1034
Digital E1
Brooktrout 1034
Analog
Brooktrout 1034
Digital T1
Brooktrout
TR114 Analog
Brooktrout
TR114 Digital
Brooktrout
TR114 Combo
Eicon Digital
Eicon Analog
DID/DNIS Routing
The DID/DNIS routing method directs faxes based on the three to seven digits
(usually the last four) that the fax board reads in the fax number. When you order
DID fax numbers, be sure to find out how many routing digits are included in the
fax number.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
153
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
To set up DID/DNIS routing:
1. Select your FaxServer service in the tree view, and click the Board/Channel
SetUp tab.
2. Select either the Wink or Immediate start mode.
The Wink/Immediate options refer to the start mode your Telco, PBX or “CO”
(Central Office) provides. Wink is the standard in the U.S.A. Confirm the start
mode your phone service uses before selecting from these options. Wink is a start
signal that informs the phone company that the board is ready to receive the DID
addressing information. This is the preferred start mode for Brooktrout boards.
The Immediate start mode receives the DID numbers within a predefined period
after the start of the call. This period is determined by your fax board. The Brooktrout 114 series for example, waits no longer than eighteen seconds for the first
and each additional DID digit.
3. Type the number of DID Digits you will receive.The DID Digits setting specifies the number of digits the Telco, PBX or CO provides. Three to seven digits
are possible; four is the most commonly used number of DID digits.
4. Click the Save Server/Board/Channel Info button, in the tool bar.
5. Start the Client, and open the User Profile for the user to whom faxes will be
routed.
6. In the DID box, type the DID number(s) that are directed to this user. Separate
multiple DID numbers with commas.
7. Click the In Routing box, and select your routing options, as described in the
previous section.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
154
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
The final step is to select the printer, directory or e-mail address to which these
faxes are sent.
Channel Routing
Channel routing is the most commonly used method of inbound routing. Channel
routing processes inbound faxes based on the channel on which the fax was
received.
You can assign channels to receive faxes sent to fax numbers as follows:
1. Click User Profile button and open the User Profile for a user to whom faxes
will be routed.
2. In the DID box, type the channel(s) directed to this user. Use commas to separate channel numbers.
3. The final step is to select the In Routing options, such as the printer, directory
and/or e-mail address to which faxes sent to this channel are routed.
DTMF Routing
This routing method uses digits supplied by your PBX or dialed by the sender to
direct the fax.If the DTMF digits aren’t being dialed, your PBX must be set up to
repeat digits from the fax number.
To set up routing by DTMF number:
1. Select your board service in the tree view, and click the Board/Channel SetUp
tab.
2. Double-click the board icon to expand it.
3. Type the DTMF Digits. This is the number of characters that are sent by this
routing method.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
155
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
4. Type the Wait (Secs). This is the number of seconds that the server waits for
DTMF digits before receiving the fax. If you anticipate receiving faxes from
fax machines, allow the senders sufficient time to type the routing characters.
5. Click the AFR/DTMF button to display the Global Channel Options.
6. In DTMF Channels, type the channel number(s) that will wait for DTMF
numbers. Separate the channel numbers with comas, e.g. 1,2,3.
7. Click the Save Server/Board/Channel Info button, in the tool bar.
8. In the Tree view chick the Users icon.
9. Then click and open the User Profile of the user to whom faxes will be routed.
10. In DID, type the DTMF digits for which the sender is prompted, and click
OK.
The final step is to select the printer, directory or e-mail address to which these
faxes are sent.
Eicon DTMF Configuration
DTMF routing for Eicon boards requires that you also execute the following procedure:
1. To display the Diva Configuration Manager, click Start menu|All Programs|Dialogic Diva|Configuration Manager.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
156
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
2. Click the Analog icon.
3. Set the Number of Digits to the same number used in the FaxServer Service
setting above.
4. In the File menu, click the Activate command.
5. Restart the computer.
CSID Routing
Create a user account that passes faxes received with a specified CSID as follows:
1. Create the TargetFax user account to forward faxes sent with a predetermined
CSID. You might use an automation account name like “Forward CSID.” This
User Profile is unrelated to a person.When a fax is received with the CSID
value for this user, the Name and Company information that you type here
identifies the sender in the Fax Manager.
2. Click the More button.
3. Type the sender’s CSID.
4. Click the CSID ellipsis, to display the User to Route to list.
5. Click a user and then click the OK button.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
157
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Faxes sent with the referenced CSID, will now appear in the received events of
the selected user.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
158
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
PDF to TIFF Conversion
This feature enables you to send and receive Adobe PDF files as faxes through
several mechanisms:
• Select a PDF file from a library, and send it as if it were a TIFF fax document. TargetFax creates a TIFF version of the PDF that it sends as a fax.
• You can create a Queue Rule that creates a TIFF version of the PDF files
detected in a scanned directory, and faxes these files.
• A PDF can be scanned for bar codes.
• When a User Profile is set to forward received documents to a fax number,
TargetFax creates a TIFF version of the PDF, which it sends as a fax.
Import the PDF2TIF Component
Though the PDF2TIF component is copied to the server when TargetFax is
installed, you must import it into TargetFax, license it and install it before you can
use it. Perform the licensing and installation steps at the TargetFax Server console.
Import the PDF2TIF Component as follows:
1. Start the System Administrator.
2. In the File menu, click Import New Component. This displays the Import/
Install a TargetFax Component box.
3. Double-click the TargetFax PDF2TIF Component.
The TargetFax License Manager displays after you import the component. You
can also start the license manager by clicking Licenses…, in the Tools menu.
Note: You must license the PDF2TIF Component at the server where the TargetFax WorkServer Service is installed.
To obtain a license key by e-mail, complete the following procedure:
1. Click the TargetFax License Manager
zation code to the Clipboard.
Copy button. This moves the authori-
2. Open an e-mail message, and address it to license@otgt.com.
3. Paste (Ctrl+v) the code into the e-mail message. Also include your name, company name and the name of your One Touch Sales Representative.
4. Send the message.
Enter your license keys as follows:
1. In the e-mail message you receive from One Touch Global Technologies, select
a license key with your mouse. If you have more than one license key, select
the code that begins with the letter “L.”
2. Copy (Ctrl+c) the license key.
3. In the Module list box, select TargetFax PDF2TIF Component.
4. Click the
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
Paste button.
159
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
5. Click Apply, and then OK.
The PDF2TIF is displayed beneath Applications, in the tree view. Configuration
options appear, to the right, in the PDF2TIF Component pane.
Install the Clear Image Run Time
If you installed the Clear Image Run Time for the Image PRO Component or the
BarCode Component you can skip this step. Otherwise, install the Clear Image
Run Time as follows:
1. In the PDF2TIF Component pane, click the Install button.
2. Click the I agree button, and then Next.
3. Restart the computer before using the PDF2TIF component.
Default PDF2TIF Settings
The default settings for the PDF2TIF component are appropriate for most inbound
and outbound PDF conversions. If the quality of converted black and white
images is poor, change the Rastermode to Black & White, and uncheck ConverttoBW. Otherwise, change the PDF2TIFF Options only when instructed to do
so by TargetFax Technical Support.
Display the default settings of the PDF2TIF options as follows:
1. Open the User Profile of the user to whom PDFs are routed, and click the
More button.
2. Click the In Routing ellipsis.
3. Check the BarCode/Image Processing/Splitting option, and click OK.
4. Click the Use DocProfile ellipsis.
5. Double-click or create a Document Profile
6. Click the Options ellipsis, to display the Profile Options.
When the PDF2TIF box is checked, PDF files routed to this user are converted to
TIFF.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
160
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
7. Check the PDF2TIF box.
8. Click the PDF2TIF ellipsis, to display the default conversion settings for
inbound and outbound PDF files.
If you accept the displayed settings and click OK, the PDF2TIF box changes to
Default. If you change these, and click OK, the value of the PDF2TIF box
changes to Custom. This indicates that this Document Profile uses PDF2TIF
options that differ from the default settings. SaveDflts saves the current settings as
the default configuration for new Document Profiles. But it doesn’t change the
PDF2TIF values for existing Document Profiles. After you’ve edited the
PDF2TIF options, you can click LoadDflts to restore the default settings.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
161
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Sending Files Saved to a Directory
This feature automates WorkFlow by faxing files copied to a directory. The Queue
Rule that manages this process comes preconfigured in TargetFax. To start the
process, all you have to do is enable the rule.
Enable faxing of files copied to a directory as follows:
1. In the System Administrator tree view, click the WorkServer Services.
2. In the Server Setup tab, click Queues/Schedule.
3. Scroll to, and double-click the Insend Dropped Files to Send Queue Rule.
4. Check the Enabled box.
5. Click the Show Details button.
During installation, TargetFax creates the C:\INSEND directory specified in the
Scan Directory box. This is the directory that TargetFax scans for files to fax. If
you copy files to be faxed to this directory, you don’t have to change the Scan
Directory path.
6. If necessary, type the path to the directory to be scanned, in the Scan Directory
box.
How the ENDSEND Rule Works
The File\Path Prefix $R\SERVERS\WORK\INsend moves the scanned file to
this location. $R indicates the directory (usually C:\TargetFax) to which TargetFax is installed. <InFile> means that files are saved with a file name that
begins with the name of the scanned file. Max Count adds three consecutively
numbered digits, which reset at 999, to the end of the file name, to insure that the
file name is unique.
Ptrn refers to the file extension of the files to be scanned. TargetFax transaction
files have a dcf extension.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
162
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
The Default Action is GetUserInfo, with Params of User,From. This action
finds the user name in the transaction file, to determine the user name under which
the submitted event is listed in the Fax Manager. User information (FromName,
FromCompany, etc.) for this user is returned from the TargetFax Users database
and becomes available for insertion into faxes.
The Close Action Queue/Rule is WORK:SEND. This routes the fax back to the
WorkServer for transmission.
7. Click OK, to save the rule.
Building a DCF File
The text file below is a sample of a TargetFax transaction file that is copied to the
scanned directory along with the TIFF or PDF file(s) to be faxed. The transaction
file must have a.dcf file extension, begin with a bracketed SEND command and
contain the TargetFax user name of a logged TargetFax user (User=), the recipient’s fax number (ToFaxNum=) or e-mail address (ToMail=) and the name(s) of
the TIFF and/or PDF files to send. Comment lines start with a semicolon.
Note: Before you can send PDF files as faxes (TIFF format), you must install the
PDF2TIF component.
A DCF file could contain as little as these four lines:
[SEND]
ToFaxNum=949-555-0295
Files=Send4.pdf
User=TKINSMAN
Optional configuration lines are required for routing (ToMail=), the inclusion of
files from TargetFax libraries (Cover=) and recipient information to insert into
cover pages(ToCompany=).
[SEND]
User=TKINMAN
ToName=Bob Smith
ToCompany=OTGT
ToFaxNum=949-555-0295
ToMail=Bsmith@ABC.com
Files=SendTBC1.pdf,sendtiff.tif
Servers=FAX
Cover=COVER1
HeaderFooter=HEADER1
Forms=DRAFT
Topic=TBC1
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
163
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The example below uses the SendTo= command to list the e-mail address, fax
number, TargetFax user, list and recipient to whom documents are sent. The
Servers= (Fax or Mail) command determines whether faxes or e-mail are sent.
In the sample below, the fax number, e-mail address and cover page information
(ToName= and ToCompany=) are not required to be listed in the dcf file because
these values are looked up for the recipients listed in the SendTo line.
[SEND]
User=TKINSMAN
SendTo=batkins@otgt.com,949-555-9856,hhottentot,MERGE,horace hottentot
Files=SendTBC1.pdf,sendtiff.tif
Servers=FAX
Cover=COVER1
HeaderFooter=HEADER1
Forms=DRAFT
Topic=TBC1
.
TargetFax Code
Sample Value
Description
ToFaxNum
574-8818
Fax Number to which documents are sent.
Required for fax transmission
User
Scott
The User Profile name under which the
Fax is to be submitted. Required
ToMail
BSmith@otgt.com
Recipient’s e-mail address. Required for
e-mail transmission
coma or plus sign separated e-mail
address, fax number, TargetFax user, list
or recipient to whom documents are sent
SendTo
Files
send.tif,send.pdf
Comma separated names of files to send
from \insend. Required. If you place a percent sign before the file name, a copy of
that file is sent from the TargetFax library.
Attachments
Purchaseorder.pdf
E-mail attachment to send from \insend
ToName
Joe Smith
Recipient’s Name (usually for CoverPage)
ToCompany
ABC Corp
Recipient’s Company (usually for CoverPage)
ToPhone
714-123-4567
Recipient’s Phone Number (usually for
CoverPage)
Servers
Fax or Mail
The method by which the fax is sent: fax
or e-mail
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
164
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
Queue
PRIORITY
The TargetFax print queue used
FaxMode
Fine
The mode of transmission (“Fine” or
“Normal”) Default is fine mode.
DateTimetoSend
07/01/98 20:30:00
The Date/Time when the fax will be sent
to the queue. By default, faxes are sent to
the queue immediately.
Cover
COVER1
The TargetFax name for the CoverPage to
use
Topic
TFPRESS
The TargetFax name for the CoverPage
Topic or the body of an e-mail
Subject
New Release of
Target
The text string that appears as the Subject
of the Coverpage or e-mail
HeaderFooter
HEADER1
The TargetFax name for the stored header/
footer to use
CoverMode
AllPages
This instruction sends the file referenced
in the “Cover=” code as the first page of
the e-mail attachment.
Forms
COPY,PASTDUE
TargetFax Overlay Forms to apply to files
MergeMode
1, 2, 3, 4
Controls when overlays are added to PDF
and TIFF files sent as e-mails and fax. See
table below.
MergeMode Overlay Options
Merge Mode
TIFF to Fax
TIFF to E-mail
PDF to Fax
PDF to E-mail
0
No Merge
No Merge
No Merge
No Merge
1
Merge
Merge
Converts to
TIFF and
overlays the
TIFF
No Merge
2
Merge
Merge
Converts to TIFF and overlays
the TIFF
3
Merge
Merge
Converts to TIFF; overlays the
TIFF; converts back to PDF
Viewing the Result of Sent Files
To view the status of transmissions:
1. Start the Fax Manager.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
165
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
2. Select the User whose name is included in the DCF file.
3. Change the view to Submitted Events.
4. Click the Status column header, to sort the events.
Routing Files Saved to a Directory
You might also want to direct all files scanned to a directory to the same user. The
Queue Rule that manages this process comes preconfigured in TargetFax. To start
the process, all you have to do is enable the rule and select the TargetFax user.
Enable routing of scanned files as follows:
1. In the System Administrator tree view, click the WorkServer Service (usually
Work1).
2. In the Server Setup tab, click Queues/Schedule.
3. Scroll to, and double-click the INRECV Inbound Dropped Files Queue Rule.
4. Click the Show Details button.
5. Make sure the Enabled box is checked.
6. In the Scan Directory box, type the full directory path to the folder that Target
Fax will scan for files to forward.
7. The Ptrn setting specifies the file extension of files that will be forwarded. You
can leave it set on Tif, select another extension, or click *.*, for all file types.
File Path\Prefix indicates the name and location to which the scanned file is
saved. The <InFile> parameter causes the file to be saved with its current
name. The MaxCount of 999 indicates that a three digit consecutively numbered
figure, which resets to zero when it reaches 999, is appended to the file name. This
assures a unique file name.
8. To change the user to whom scanned files will be sent, click the Default
Action ellipsis.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
166
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
9. The Value box displays the name of the user who will receive the files. Type
another user name, and click OK.
10. Click OK. Scanned files will now be routed to the specified TargetFax user.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
167
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Installing and Using the XML Component
The TargetFax XML Component provides the ability to perform a variety of functions with XML files. XML files can be created that include information about
associated image files. Images can also be embedded into these XML files.
Importing and Licensing the TargetFax XML Component
Before you can use the XML component, you must install it and apply your
license keys as follows:
1. Click the Import New Component command in the System Administrator
File menu.
2. Click the TargetFax XML Component and then the Install button, to add the
XML component to the tree view.
3. In the Module list box, click the TargetFax XML Component.
Configuring the XML Component
There are no configuration options that need to be set for this component. The
default values should work for most applications. Changes should only be made
when recommended by TargetFax Technical Support.
Adding a Directory Scan Rule to the WorkServer
If you have multiple types of XML files or you route dropped files by fax and email, you must set up a scan rules for each file type and routing method. Set up a
Scan Rule for Sending files tiff files copied to a directory as follows:
1. Click the WorkServer Service (usually Work1).
2. Beneath the Queues/Schedule tab, click the INSEND rule.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
168
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
3. Click the Add New Queue/Rule button, on the right, to display Add Queue
Rule Information.
4. Change the Queue name to INSXML, add an appropriate Description, and
click the Show Details button.
5. In Scan Directory, type the directory path to which XML files will be copied.
Though the example below shows a local path, this may be any network share.
6. Select “.xml” as the Ptrn (file type) for which to scan.
7. Click the Open Action ellipsis to display the Action/Rule that selects and
interprets XML files.
8. Click the Action/Rule list box and select Dcf(Action).
9. In DcfAction, click TestFile.
10. In Params, type the Base Tag, the Index Tag and the field name attribute
from the XML file, separated by colons. This tells TargetFax how to interpret
the XML files it scans.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
169
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The XML(GetData) Function Parameters
This section explains how to find and format the XML (GetData) function parameter. These parameters are formatted as “BaseTag:IndexTag:Fld[=Val]”. The
XML code below will serve as an example.
The BaseTag is the tag that contains the list of indexes or fields. In this case it is
“data.” TargetFax also scans for lower level tags. However, if a sub tag appeared
previously at any level, you need to specify the tag hierarchy by using a “\”, e.g
“record\indexes”.
The Index Tag is the name of the tag that defines each index or field. In this case it
is “index”.
TargetFax provides two methods for identify an index field and value: use an
attribute for the field name or specify both the field name and value with their own
sub tag. The latter is defined using the Fld=Val syntax. The former uses just the
Fld portion of the parameter. In the example above, the field name is specified
with the attribute “id”.
So the correct syntax for the GetData function is simply data:index:id, typed in
the Params box of the TestFile action:
11. Click OK to return to the previous dialog:
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
170
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
The Default Action associated with this rule obtains the User’s From information
from the database. The Close Action routes the event to the WorkServers standard
SEND rule.
12. To complete this rule, check the Enabled box and click the Add button.
Testing the INSXML Directory Scan Rule
The new rule starts working when enabled. To test it, try dropping xml files (similar to the that described above) into the INSXML directory.
The syntax for the fields in the XML file is unlimited. At minimum, the XML file
must specify the fax number and file(s) to send. This information appears in the
ToFaxNum field and a Files list, respectively. The Files to send must be either:
• In the TargetFax Library (indicated with a leading “%”)
• Specified with a complete path
• In the Scan Directory before the XML file is dropped
Additional fields could specify the Topic and Cover, overlay Forms, Servers and
the Queue to use etc. Additional fields could also be specified for embedding or
tracking purposes. In the sample above, the User fields ID1, ID2, and ID3 are also
embedded into another DocInfo field, which is then overlaid onto the document
using docinfo, an overlay form with the same name. In such cases, it is assumed
that the sending application knows how to include the literal “<ID1>” values in
the XML file. (Hint: use &#60;ID1&#62;).
Faxes are usually sent to individual recipients using the ToName, ToCompany,
ToPhone, ToFaxNum, ToMail fields. Multiple recipients can be addressed with
fax numbers, e-mail addresses or symbolic names, such as a recipient list names,
in the SendTo field. TargetFax first checks the Recipients List database. If a
match is not found, it searches the Users database. faxes or e-mail us sent to all
entries in the DataSource or List. A record of the outgoing Faxes (or Emails) can
be found in the Events table of the supplied User in the Fax Manager. Notifications of the Results of these Transmissions will be sent according to the Outbound
actions associated with the sending user.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
171
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
NOTE: It is generally assumed that the User Accounts used will match those
already entered into TargetFax. If an unknown User Account is specified, events
(and notifications) be will associated with the Default Sender account (see next
section)
Default Sender and Receiver
The Default Receiver, specified on the Users pane of the System Administrator,
is the user to whom INCOMING events are routed when no routing information
is included with the event, to identify it, thereby enabling forwarding to the indicated user. The e-mail and file drop methods used by this and other components
can facilitate sending from users that are not on file in Target. TargetFax therefore
allows you to configure a Default Sender account for this purpose.
To set this up, go to the Users pane in the System Administrator:
Press the “…”, to the right of Default Sender, to choose an existing account for
this purpose (or create a new account).
The TargetFax Mail Connector
The TargetFax Mail Connector sends e-mail notification of received and sent
faxes. Inclusion of the fax, as a multi-page TIFF or PDF attachment, is optional.
This section explains how to configure and license this component.
Add the MailServer Service for the Mail Connector
If you have not installed the WorkServer and Board Server Services, follow the
instructions in "Chapter - 5 Add the WorkServer and Board Services" on page 79,
before continuing the installation.
Install the Service
Install the MailServer Service as follows:
1. In the tree view, click MailServer Services.
2. In the toolbar, click the Install New Mail Service button to display the Add
New MAIL Service box.
The Friendly ID is the name by which TargetFax identifies the MailServer service.
3. Type a Friendly ID (optional).
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
172
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
4. Click OK to install the service under a system account.
Apply the License key for the TargetFax Mail Connector
After you ran the TargetFax setup program and contacted One Touch Sales, you
were sent the license key for this service. If you still have the license key for the
Mail Connector (it begins with an M), you don’t need to request a license key for
this service, you can apply it now.
To obtain a license key by e-mail, complete the following procedure:
1. Click the TargetFax License Manager
zation code to the Clipboard.
Copy button. This moves the authori-
2. Open an e-mail message, and address it to license@otgt.com.
3. Paste (Ctrl+v) the code into the e-mail message. Also include your name, company name and the name of your One Touch Sales Representative.
4. Send the message.
5. Continue with Install the Service, below. You can apply your license keys after
you receive them from OTGT.
Enter your license key as follows:
1. In the e-mail message you receive from One Touch Global Technologies, select
a license key with your mouse. If you have more than one license key, select
the key that begins with the letter “M.”
2. If necessary, start the System Administrator, and click Licenses, in the Tools
menu.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
173
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
3. In the Module list box, select TargetFax Mail Connector.
4. Click the
Paste button.
5. Click Apply, and OK.
Configure the MailServer Service
Your method for specifying your SMTP Server depends on whether you have
you own SMTP Server or you rely on a third-party hosting service. For instance, if
you have a Microsoft Exchange server on your network, you type the computer
name (the domain name is not required) of this server in the SMTP Server box.
The procedure for using a third party service is similar to how you set up an e-mail
client, such as Outlook. In the SMTP Server box, type the name of your outgoing
mail server. This takes the form Mail.Domainname.com or SMTP.Domainname.com, depending on what your ISP requires.
If authentication is required, you may also need to check the Authorization box,
to enable the Log On As and Password boxes. In the Log On As box, type an email account name provided by your ISP. The account name is the part of an email address that comes before the domain name. For Jjones@TargetFax.com the account name is Jjones. Password is the password required to
check your e-mail.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
174
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
The Default User is the user account that creates e-mail messages sent by the
Mail Server. Sent e-mail messages are saved in the Event Viewer submitted events
for this user. TargetFax sends e-mail messages to the e-mail address contained in
the User Profile of the user from whom faxes are forwarded. No entry is required
in the Email Address box.
Configure the MailServer Service as follows:
1. Click the Default User ellipsis and double-click a user.
2. Type the e-mail address of the user and click OK.
3. Fill in the SMTP Server information as described above.
4. Make sure that the SMTP Port is set correctly for your mail server. The
default SMTP port number is 25. If 25 is incorrect, type your number in the
SMTP Port box.
5. Click MailServer Services.
6. Click the Yes button, to save your changes.
7. Start the Mail Connector Service (usually Mail1) by selecting it in the tree
view, opening the Tools menu and clicking Start Service.
Receiving e-mail
Once the MailServer Service is working, you can create and action that send
received e-mail messges to a TargetFax user as follows:
1. In the System Administrator tree view, click the mail sever service (usually
Mail1).
2. At the top of the Queues/Schedule tab, double-click the RECV queue.
3. Ckick the Show Details button.
4. Check the Enabled box.
5. Click the Open Action ellipsis.
6. In Params, type the name for a User Profile, and click the OK button.
E-mail messages will appear in the Received Events of this user.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
175
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
176
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
Separating Documents within Fax Transmissions
Rather than send faxes as individual documents, it may be more convenient to
send multiple documents in one fax transmission. TargetFax provides the following methods for separating the constituent documents before the files are written
to disk:
• None: Overrides any Separator Method that may have been specified in the
Default Document Profile
• Every N Pages: When all documents have the same number of pages, the
fax is split each time that this number of pages is received.
• Blank Page: Blank pages, inserted between documents, trigger document
splits. This option appears only when the IMAGEPRO Component is
licensed.
• BarCode: Documents are split when bar codes are scanned. "Routing and
Splitting Bar Coded Faxes" on page 195. This option appears only when the
BarCode Component is licensed.
The separator method used is an option of the Document Profile associated with
the user who receives the fax. Select a separator method as follows:
1. From the User Profile of the user to whom faxes are routed, click the In Routing ellipsis.
2. Check the BarCode/Image Processing/Splitting option.
For this exercise, create a custom Document Profile for faxes received by this
user. If a custom Document Profile is not selected or created, the Separator
option selected in the Default Document Profile is operative. "WorkServer
Inbound Routing Defaults" on page 44.
3. Check the Use DocProfile box.
4. Click the Use Document Profiles ellipsis, to display the Document Profiles.
5. In the tool bar, click the Add New Document Profile icon.
6. Type the Profile Name, and click the Options ellipsis.
7. Check the Separator box, and click a Separator option.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
177
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Outbound Completion Actions
The Outbound Completion Actions are displayed when you click the Out Actions
box, in the Edit User Information page. Several options are available to inform
users of the results of fax transmissions sent by their accounts and save copies or
annotated copies to disk.
Overlay Completion Status on Image: This feature applies your choice of overlays to the retained copies of faxes sent by this user. You can see the overlay in the
completed events of the sender, on the printed fax, an image file saved to disk or
an image sent as an e-mail attachment. To overlay an image, check the O and a
boxes.Then click the Use Custom StartImage ellipsis and select or make an
overlay file. Any information included in a fax confirmation can be added to the
fax as an overlay. See "Overlays:" on page 22 of the TargetFax User Guide.
Print to User’s Printer: Prints copies of all sent faxes, to the printer selected in
the User Profile
Send Notification to User’s Email: Sends specified information to the e-mail
address in the User Profile of the user who successfully or unsuccessfully sends
the fax. If you are using this option, be sure the e-mail address of the user for
whom you are creating a completion action appears in their User Profile.
Include Attachment: Includes a TIFF formatted copy of the sent fax as an attachment to the e-mail notification message
Custom Send Topic: Click this ellipsis to display the Topic to Use list. From here,
you can create a new topic or select a topic to send.
See "System Defaults for Notifications" on page 37. For instruction in creating
topics, see “Chapter -1 6365868,” of the TargetFax User Guide.
Convert TIFs to PDF: Forwards the sent fax to the user’s e-mail as a PDF attachment
Notify only if Sent OK: Sends e-mail messages when faxes send successfully
Notify only if Fax Failed: Sends e-mail messages for all failed faxes
Note: Select only one of the “Notify only” options. If both of these options are
checked, notifications are not sent.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
178
C h a p t e r - 7 Ta r g e t F a x f o r W o r k F l o w
Copy to Document Management System/Copy to Custom DMSPath: To save
sent faxes to a directory, check these boxes, click the Copy to Custom DMSPath
ellipsis and browse to the directory where faxes are saved in TIFF format.
You can’t browse to the end of a directory path without selecting a file. After you
select a file and click Open, you can erase the file name and replace it with file
naming parameters that will result in unique file names. A file name such as
<USER>$m$d$y$h$M would save faxes from this user to a folder named for the
user, followed by a file name consisting of date and time values that ensure unique
file names. Annotated image files, saved to user directories could serve as fax
confirmation sheets. See "File and Directory Naming Parameters" on page 144.
Copy to Document Management System/Copy to Custom DMSType: After
you check these boxes, you can click the File Type list box and select the file format in which the faxes are saved to disk.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
179
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
180
Chapter - 8 TargetFax FTP Connector
The TargetFax FTP Connector gives you two ways to share data by sending it to
FTP Servers: with the Upload/Download feature, you can send data to an FTP
server such as Image Silo, or download it from another FTP server. You can use
TargetFax FTP Gateways to send faxes and other files between TargetFax sites.
This lets you share expensive resources, such as high-speed fax boards among distributed TargetFax sites.
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The FTP Connector
In addition to its core components, TargetFax also provides optional connectors to
other resources, which can be included in TargetFax WorkFlow.
One example of this is the TargetFax FTP Connector. This gives TargetFax the
ability to upload to, and download from, remote FTP servers. You can also use the
FTP service as a Gateway that connects multiple TargetFax installations, thus providing Remote Forwarding and Capture capabilities, and centralized Fax services.
Importing and Licensing the TargetFax FTP Connector
The TargetFax FTP Connector is installed using the System Administrator as follows:
1. In the File menu, click the Import New Component command, to display the
Import/Install TargetFax Component window.
2. Select the TargetFax FTP Connector, and then click Install. This adds the
FTP Server component to the Servers branch of the tree, and displays it as
shown.
Before the TargetFax FTP Connector can be used it must be licensed. The License
Manager should appear automatically at this time. If you choose to do this later,
select the Licenses… command on the Tools menu.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
182
C h a p t e r - 8 Ta r g e t F a x F T P C o n n e c t o r
3. Select the TargetFax FTP Connector.
4. Now request a license code as described in “Licensing Manager” on page 24.
Adding an FTPServer Upload Service
Each TargetFax FTPService facilitates connection to a single FTP Server. It can
be installed on any machine, but is typically installed on the TargetFax Server.
With the FTPServer Services leaf selected, click the AddNew button on the toolbar. The Add New FTP Service box appears:
Each FTPService must have a unique name. This name may appear in the list of
available Servers. So make it an easily recognizable name, especially if you have
more than one FTP Service. An abbreviated version of the FTP address of the
Server works well.
While you can use the same server for FTP uploads/downloads, and as an FTP
Gateway to TargetFax sites, this rarely happens. The following procedure explains
how to use the batch upload method to connect to Digitech’s ImageSilo site.
1. Type a Friendly ID, such as Silo, for the FTP service.
The default FTP Address is the Friendly ID value followed by “.com.”
2. Type the name of the FTP Address obtained from the FTP site owner. In this
case, we used Upload.imagesilo.com.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
183
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
3. Click OK. This service will be installed using the local System Account.
If we were installing on a computer other than the TargetFax Server, you would
need to use a Network Account, in which case you would select this account as
you do when installing the WorkServer (see Chapter - 6 Add the WorkServer and
Board Services).
The FTPServer Service is installed, but not started.
4. The default port for an FTP Server is 21. If the server you are connecting to
uses this port, you can leave the FTP Port field blank. Otherwise, type the
FTP port number for this computer.
5. If the server you are connecting to allows anonymous logon, check the Anonymous box. Otherwise, type the Log On As ID and user Password you were
given by the FTP server owner.
6. If you will be using the Billing Rates facility to track uploads, click the User
list box, and select the user who’s User Information will include the billing rate
settings.
The Local Path is the root directory from which files are uploaded to the FTP
server. Project directories are created beneath this directory. This is where you
deposit files for upload. Projects typically upload to Image Silo and Digitech
PaperVision from the same directory.
7. If necessary, type the Local Path to the directory above your project folders.
8. Click in the tree view. In the toolbar, click the Save Server Info icon.
How the Rules Work
In the Queues/Schedule tab, you’ll see the UPLOAD rule. This is the only rule
you need to configure before using FTP Upload. After processing the Main
Queue, the FTPServer processes the UPLOAD rule. The last nine of the Queues/
Schedule rules, used only by TargetFax FTP Gateways, are disabled by default.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
184
C h a p t e r - 8 Ta r g e t F a x F T P C o n n e c t o r
Double-click the Upload rule. The Edit Queue/Rule dialog box is displayed
below. Click the Show Details button, and it looks like this:
The ScanEvt Type creates events in the SERVERS\<Resource>\RECV directory,
where the <Resource> is a symbolic variable. In this rule, the value of Resource
is “Silo.”
Events Loc: This is the SERVERS\SILO\UPLOAD directory to which files
named G000001,G000002, etc. will be written.
When this rule is triggered, the Open Action is called.
Open Action: The FTP(TestUpload) action checks for local Project files to
upload. When one is found, the Default Action is triggered to upload the project’s
files to ImageSilo.
In the Digitech world, a Project defines a table in the PaperVision or ImageSilo
database containing indexed fields that describe attributes of a document in the
database. Indexes are identified by parsing parts of the document’s file name. The
255 character file name may not be long enough to include all the necessary
indexes. Thus, Digitech’s naming convention includes the directory structure as
well. For example, the indexing structure for a project might be “CustomerID\Department\EmployeeID_EmpName_EmpPhone”. In this case, the document would be located several subdirectories down from the Project directory.
When we talk about uploading all the files in a project, this refers to finding all
files in that project’s directory or subdirectories, and then uploading them to the
FTP server, while preserving their relative directory structure.
Count: Limits the number of Projects uploaded at a time (default = 50)
Wait: Seconds to wait (default = 20) before scanning again
The Default Action executes when new files are detected. The FTP(Upload)
function uploads the files from the Local Path to the equivalent location on the
FTP server. It has two parameters: Project and Mode. The Project parameter specifies the project to upload. If left blank, the Project identified by the TestUpload
function is used. Mode has two values that control the upload process:
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
185
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
• Silo: This Upload function places a trigger file called “dirmgr.submit’ in the
Project directory of the FTP server after all the files have been uploaded.
This tells ImageSilo that new files are waiting for upload. In this mode, the
Upload function deletes all the local files once they have been successfully
uploaded.
• Delete: This mode also deletes all the local files, but does not put a
“dirmgr.submit” file onto the FTP site.
Specify Project Directories
1. Click the Open Action ellipsis to display the Params for this action.
2. In the Params box, type a comma and each of the project directories beneath
your local path, separated by commas, as shown.
3. Click OK.
The UPLOAD rule should look like this:
4. To start the service, click the Start Service button, on the toolbar. The Last Status boxes will change to the current date and time, and indicate “Checking
Queues”, then “Updating Server Queues”, and then change to “Idle”:
The TargetFax FTP Upload Service is operational.
Test the FTP Server Upload and Download Service
The easiest way to test the FTPServer upload is to configure TargetFax to copy a
received fax, saved as a PDF or TIF, to the C:\EXTDIG\Project1 directory.
Ideally, you should use a directory naming scheme that demonstrates a couple of
indexes.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
186
C h a p t e r - 8 Ta r g e t F a x F T P C o n n e c t o r
When the fax arrives, it should appear briefly in the local Project1 subdirectory. If you then log on to the FTP site, you should see the same file in the Projects
directory.
If you are using ImageSilo, the index values should match those set up for the
Project. After a short while, you will see the file disappear from the FTP Server,
when moved to ImageSilo.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
187
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The TargetFax FTPServer Gateway Service
TargetFax installations communicate and share resources over the Internet by
passing information through an FTP site. The software that manages this communication is called the TargetFax FTP Gateway Service.
Forward and Send Faxes Via FTP
It might be difficult to justify the expense of installing a high speed fax board for a
few users at a remote office. With the FTP Gateway feature, faxes received on a
board equipped TargetFax Server can be forwarded to the users of a TargetFax
Server with no fax board, via FTP. See “Forwarding Received Faxes from one
TargetFax Site to Another Via FTP” on page 188.
You can also send a fax from your remote workstation, by way of an FTP server,
to a board equipped TargetFax Server, which then transmits the fax over a phone
line. If you set up the forwarding of received faxes, begin this procedure on page
page 196. Otherwise, see “Using a Remote Fax Board Server to Send Faxes” on
page 194.
With the FTPServers installed, and the sites published, you can route faxes in
either or both directions. This section provides sample procedures for sending and
receiving faxes via FTP. Each example includes two TargetFax “sites” (a Targetfax Server and its connected workstation clients): a fictitious remote site has a
TargetFax Server with no fax board; a Corporate office site has fax board(s) in the
Server.
Forwarding Received Faxes from one TargetFax Site to Another Via FTP
This exercise creates a service that accesses our onetouchgt.com FTP server. If
you have not imported the FTP Connector, see “Importing and Licensing the TargetFax FTP Connector” on page 182.
We’ll set up a recipient’s user information to move faxes sent to this user’s DID
numbers from a TargetFax (with fax board) site, to an FTP site. A TargetFax
Server, at a remote office, moves these faxes from the FTP server to the user’s
events in the Fax Manager of the remote site. To test the Gateway, we’ll send a fax
to a Corporate office DID fax number, and receive it at the remote site.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
188
C h a p t e r - 8 Ta r g e t F a x F T P C o n n e c t o r
Install the FTP Service on a Remote Site Computer
Install the FTP Service on the remote (no fax board installed) site as follows:
1. Select the FTPServer Services leaf, and click the AddNew button on the toolbar. The Add New FTP Service dialog box appears:
2. For the Friendly ID, we used OTGT. Type a name that describes the function
of this FTP service.
3. Type the address of your FTP Server.
4. Click OK.
The new FTPServer Service will be installed and added to the tree view. With the
new FTP Service selected, the Server Setup tab appears.
Site Naming Considerations
We use the term “site” to refer to a TargetFax Server and it’s workstations. The
name for the TargetFax Server should be meaningful throughout your organization. Unless you have multiple TargetFax Sites at the same location, the location
name is a good choice, e.g. PHOENIX, LA or HQ, etc. If you have multiple sites
installed at one location, a functionally descriptive name, such as “PRODUCTION” or “DEMO”, is preferable. An alternative is to use the name of the computer that hosts the TargetFax Server for the site. The only constraints are that the
names be fairly short, and not used by other servers that share the same gateway.
Publish the Remote Site
Once you decide on a name, you need to publish this name so that other sites
using the same Gateway can see its resources. In our example, we used the site
name “Dallas” to represent a TargetFax Server at a field office in Dallas that
requires a connection to the TargetFax Server at the corporate headquarters. Publish your site as follows:
1. In the Server Setup tab, type the Log On As and Password information for
this site.
2. If you will be using the Billing Rates facility to track uploads, click the User
list box, and select the user who’s User Information will include the billing rate
settings.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
189
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
3. Click the Publish As check box, and type the name of the site. TargetFax creates a directory with this name beneath the path specified in the FTP Address
box.
Each published site requires a subdirectory on the FTP Server.
4. In the FTP Address box, type the FTP Address, followed by the directory path
where the sites will be published. We’ll use /SITES. Our definition looks
like this:
5. Click the Publish As ellipsis, and select the Faxserver Service that sends faxes
to this site.
6. Click outside of this text box.
7. When prompted to save changes, click Yes.
This FTPServer Service processes the MAIN, RECV, FORWARD, ACCEPT,
REPLY, PRIORITY, NORMAL, READY, RETRY, and STATUS queues.
These rules require no configuration. The Queue rules put events onto the Gateway, and the ScanEvt rules retrieve them at the specified destination. The FORWARD rule forwards received faxes to remote users, and the RECV rule receives
and routes them to the desired users. The PRIORITY, NORMAL, READY and
RETRY rules send events to remote Fax and Mail Servers, and the ACCEPT rule
accepts them and routes them to the appropriate server queue. The REPLY rule
reports the results of the remote transmissions, and the STATUS rule retrieves
their status and updates the local database.
Finally, before starting the Service, you should disable the rules you don’t need
and enable the ones you want to use.
Because disabling rules at the Group level disables them for all resources in the
group, you may need to enable the Gateway rules for the FTPServer Services
branch first.
8. If necessary, click the FTPServer Services branch, in the tree view, and enable
the Gateway rules at the group level. You do this by double-clicking a rule, in
the Queues/Schedule tab, and checking the Enabled box.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
190
C h a p t e r - 8 Ta r g e t F a x F T P C o n n e c t o r
9. Repeat the last step until all twelve (MAIN-STATUS) Gateway rules are
enabled.
10. Click the new FTP service you just created and disable the UPLOAD and
DNLOAD rules.
11. Press the Start Service button on the toolbar. The Last Status information will
change to the current date and time, and indicate “Checking Queues”, then
“Updating Server Queues”, and then changes to “Idle”:
The next step is to select the server that will send the fax through its fax board.
You can’t do that until you have published the corporate site.
The dialing plan on the computer where the fax originates controls the dialing of
the area code. If the computer that faxes through the phone lines (corporate site) is
located in a different area code, change the local area code in the default dialing
plan to be the local area code at the corporate site.
Publish the Corporate Site
The procedure for publishing an FTP site from the TargetFax Server where the fax
board is installed is very similar to publishing a site from the remote location.
Publish a new site as follows:
1. When you add the new FTP service, type the same Friendly ID that you used
for the remote TargetFax site. In the Server Setup information, do as you did
at the Dallas site, but type Corporate in the Publish As box.
2. Click the Save Server Info button, in the toolbar.
3. Click the Publish As ellipsis and select the FaxServer Service that you will
make available.
4. Enable the Gateway rules, and disable the UPLOAD and DNLOAD rules, as
previously described.
5. Start the FTPServer service.
Set Up User Information for Routing
Faxes sent to a specified DID are processed by the User Information associated
with that DID to forward the fax to the remote user. Set up User Information on
the Corporate TargetFax site that routes faxes sent to the Sales User at the remote
site as follows:
1. Log in to the remote site as a Widows user with TargetFax Administrator
rights.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
191
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
2. Start the System Adminstrator, and add a TargetFax user account (See “User
Administration” in “Chapter - 2 TargetFax System Administration.”) to represent the recipient user at the remote TargetFax site. In our example, we’ll call
this user “Sales User.” Fill in the user information as shown below:
You might want to add this user to a new Group, with the same name as this
user’s site. Associate User Rights are sufficient since this user has no need to run
programs on the Corporate site.
3. Type the DID. This is usually the last four digits of the user’s fax number.
Route the Fax via the FTP Server
Faxes received by this user must now be routed to a user at the remote site.
1. Click the In Routing ellipsis, to display the Inbound Routing Options.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
192
C h a p t e r - 8 Ta r g e t F a x F T P C o n n e c t o r
2. If you do not want to also send faxes for this user to the Corporate server Fax
Manager, check the Use CustomX Actions box.
3. Click the Forward to Other User(s) checkbox.
4. To forward to a remote user, click the New Ind... button. Then type the user’s
name and location in the following format: sales.user@OTGT-Dallas,
where “sales.user” is the user’s name, OTGT is the TargetFax FTPServer, and
Dallas is the name of the site published on this server.
Note: Be sure to replace the space in the user name with a period.
5. Click thick button. The remote user appears in Selected Recipients.
6. To also forward to a local user, double-click the users you want to transfer to
the Selected Receivers list.
7. Click OK, to close the User list.
This completes the remote user forwarding process setup.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
193
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Test FTP Routing
To test this routing configuration, send a fax to the fax number in the User Information for the Sales User. The event will have a status of Transferred, in the Fax
Manager at the Corporate site, until the remote site signals that the fax is received.
After the status changes to OK, check the Fax Manager on the remote site computer for faxes directed to this user.
See “Monitoring the Progress of a Remote Event” on page 197 for more information.
Using a Remote Fax Board Server to Send Faxes
This section explains how to send faxes from a remote TargetFax Server, without
a fax board, by FTP, to a TargetFax Server at the Corporate office that transmits it
through phone lines.
The process of configuring TargetFax to send through a remote fax board begins
with the steps described in the previous example: add the FTPServer, set the rules
and publish the site. If you have completed these steps, proceed to “Route Sent
Faxes through FTP” on page 196.
Publish the Remote Site
If you haven’t installed the TargetFax FTP Connector at the remote site, complete
this procedure, as described previously.
Return to the remote installation and publish your site as follows:
1. In the System Administrator tree view, click your FTP Service.
2. In the Server Setup tab, type the Log On As and Password information for
this site.
3. If you will be using the Billing Rates facility to track uploads, click the User
list box, and select the user who’s User Information will include the billing rate
settings.
4. Click the Publish As check box, and type the name of the site. In our example,
the remote site is in Dallas.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
194
C h a p t e r - 8 Ta r g e t F a x F T P C o n n e c t o r
Note: If the Publish As check box, is disabled, your license doesn’t include the
TargetFax FTP Gateway.
Each published site requires a subdirectory on the FTP Server.
5. In the FTP Address box, type the FTP Address, followed by the directory path
to which files will be uploaded. We’ll use/Site. Our definition looks like
this:
6. Click outside of this text box.
7. When prompted to save changes, click Yes.
Finally, before starting the Service, you should disable the rules you don’t need
and enable the ones you want to use.
Because disabling rules at the Group level disables them for all resources in the
group, you may need to enable the Gateway rules for the FTPServer Services
branch first.
8. If necessary, click the FTPServer Services branch, in the tree view, and enable
the Gateway rules at the group level. You do this by double-clicking a rule, in
the Queues/Schedule tab, and checking the Enabled box.
9. Repeat the last step until all twelve (MAIN-STATUS) Gateway rules are
enabled.
10. Disable the UPLOAD and DNLOAD rules.
11. Press the Start Service button on the toolbar. The Last Status information will
change to the current date and time, and indicate “Checking Queues”, then
“Updating Server Queues”, and then change to “Idle”:
Publish the Corporate Site
The procedure for publishing an FTP site from the corporate office is very similar
to publishing a site from the remote location. Publish a new site as follows:
1. When you add the new FTP service, use a Friendly ID that identifies the TargetFax site. In the Server Setup information, do as you did at the Dallas site,
but type Corporate in the Publish As box.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
195
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
2. Click the Save Server Info button, in the toolbar.
3. Start the FTPServer service.
Route Sent Faxes through FTP
Set the default Server to be the a Board Server Service on the TargetFax Corporate
site Server as follows:
1. At the Dallas TargetFax Server, or one of it’s client workstations, start TargetFax Client.
2. Click the SVRS ellipsis.
3. Check the Show All Servers box.
When Show all Servers is checked, this list shows all the servers that this site can
publish.
FAX@OTGT-Corporate represents the FaxServer Service on the Corporate TargetFax site. “OTGT” is the name of the FTPServer service, and “Corporate” is the
name of the published site. If this Server had more board services, these would be
listed beneath FAX@OTGT-Corporate. You can select a single board server,
such as Fax1, or as many as appear.
4. Check the Fax1 box, and then click OK.
5. Click the Save Defaults button.
All faxes sent through the Client, on this work station, will now be transmitted
through the corporate office TargetFax server.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
196
C h a p t e r - 8 Ta r g e t F a x F T P C o n n e c t o r
Monitoring the Progress of a Remote Event
If you have completed the setup procedures for sending and receiving via FTP,
you can test the system by sending a fax from the remote site to the fax number of
the user who’s faxes are forwarded from the Corporate to the remote TargetFax
site.
After you send this fax, click the Fax Manager button.You’ll see the event you
just submitted:
The status of the most recent event is Transferred. This means it’s already been
transferred across the Gateway to the Corporate TargetFax remote site. The Status
will change to OK when the fax reaches its final destination. After the Status
changes to OK, you can view this event in the Received Events for the user at
this site to whom the fax was forwarded.
At the Corporate site, you can see the received fax in the Received Events for the
user with the DID to which you faxed. Since this fax was then sent to the remote
site, this also appears in the Submitted Events for this user.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
197
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
198
Chapter - 9 The TargetFax BarCode Component
The BarCode Component interprets D1, D2, Datamatrix and PDF 417 bar codes in
received faxes. It uses this information (e.g. sender’s name, account number, etc.)
to determine how received documents are processed. Bar codes also separate the
documents in a fax transmission.
Before you can use the BarCode Component, you must import, license and install
it. This section explains how to perform these tasks. It then provides instructions
for setting the BarCode Component to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change BarCode system default settings
Set bar code decoding options for the faxes routed to a user
Separate documents within a fax transmission
Overlay a unique file name onto each received document
Route bar coded documents to a printer
Save bar coded documents to a directory
Send e-mail notification when a fax with no bar codes is received
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
BarCode Component Installation and Configuration
Import the BarCode Component
Though the BarCode Component is copied to the server when TargetFax is
installed, you must import it into TargetFax, license it and install it before you can
use it. Perform the licensing and installation steps at the TargetFax Server console.
Import the BarCode Component as follows:
1. Start the System Administrator.
2. In the File menu, click Import New Component. This displays the Import/
Install TargetFax Component box.
3. Click the TargetFax BarCode Component, and then the Install button.
The TargetFax License Manager displays after you import the component. You
can also start the license manager by clicking Licenses…, in the Tools menu.
Note: You must license the BarCode component at the server where the TargetFax
WorkServer Service is installed.
To obtain a license key by e-mail, complete the following procedure:
1. Click the TargetFax License Manager
zation code to the Clipboard.
Copy button. This moves the authori-
2. Open an e-mail message, and address it to license@otgt.com.
3. Paste (Ctrl+v) the code into the e-mail message. Also include your name, company name and the name of your One Touch Sales Representative.
4. Send the message.
Enter your license keys as follows:
1. In the e-mail message you receive from One Touch Global Technologies, select
a license key with your mouse. If you have more than one license key, select
the code that begins with the letter “B.”
2. Copy (Ctrl+c) the license key.
3. In the Module list box, select TargetFax BarCode Component.
4. Click the
Paste button.
5. Click Apply, and then OK.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
200
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
The BARCODE Component is displayed beneath Applications, in the tree view.
Configuration options appear, to the right, in the BARCODE Component pane.
Install the Clear Image Run Time
If you installed the Clear Image Run Time for the PDF2TIF Component or the
Image PRO Component, you can skip this step. Otherwise, install the Clear Image
Run Time as follows:
1. In the BarCode Recognition section, click the Install button.
2. Click the I agree button, and then Next.
BarCode Generation Installation
After the Clear Image Run Time is installed from the BarCode, ImagePro or
PDF2TIF Component, the Install button in the BarCode Generation section
becomes active. Click this button to install the BarCode Generator.
Restart the computer before using the BarCode Component.
Bar Code Fonts Installation and Setup
Before you can use TargetFax to create a bar coded test fax to send to yourself,
you need to install the bar code font(s) you’ll use. Make sure that you have
stopped all TargetFax Services and removed the TargetFax Tray icon on all TargetFax Workstations.
The required bar code fonts must be installed on the Server(s) where the WorkServices run, and where the FaxServer Services merges overlays. Although it is not
essential, we suggest that you also install the bar code font(s) on workstations that
will overlay bar codes to your documents. Install the font(s) as follows.
1. Click the BARCODE icon, in the System Administrator tree view.
2. Click the Setup button.
3. Click the Fonts tab.
4. Click the Add New Font button.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
201
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
5. Click the Font Name ellipsis, and select a bar code font.
Depending on the font you select, additional font information may be required.
The picture below shows the default settings for a Code 39 font. This font uses an
asterisk as the value for Start With and End With.
6. In the Spaces list box, click the underscore option.
7. Make sure Convert to is set to Uppercase.
Substitutions is used to convert characters scanned from bar codes to other characters. This might be useful if bar code data scanned from faxes were used to create the file names to which these faxes are saved. To add a substitution, type a
character, followed by the character that will replace it. To replace periods with
comas, you would type “,.” To create more substitutions, type more two character
combinations.
8. Click the Add button.
9. Click OK, to save the configuration information.
The new font name is now listed in the BarCode Settings.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
202
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
Free 3 of 9 Extended
Since the “extended” font supports lower-case characters, set Convert to to
{None}. Change the other settings as shown.
Free 3 of 9
Change the settings as shown.
When you overlay either of these fonts to a fax document, set the point size to at
least 18 points.
Bar codes are inserted into documents as overlay fields. See “Inserting Embedded
Fields Formatted as Bar Codes,” in “Chapter - 5 Overlay Fields” of the TargetFax
User Guide.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
203
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Setup
Press the Setup button to display the BarCode recognition settings.
Symbologies
TargetFax can process bar codes created with the 1 D, PDF 417 (2 D) and Data
Matrix symbologies. The 1 D symbology is included and enabled irrespective of
your BarCode license. The names of your licensed symbologies display as active
check boxes beneath Other Symbologies. Check the boxes of the symbologies
you will be receiving. Then check the Enabled box, and click OK.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
204
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
The BARCODE Component Main Screen
This section explains the options and actions available to customize processing of
bar coded documents.
Lookup Values
Click the Lookup Values button to display the Individual Document Profiles. All
document profile types are accessible from this dialog box.
Document Profiles
Document profiles control two bar code related aspects of how a fax is received
and processed: the first is document splitting. People often put a stack of documents, with or without a cover pages, on the fax machine. If you received this fax
on a fax machine, someone would separate the documents. This job is now handled by the TargetFax Splitting feature.
Document profiles also specify how and when the bar codes contained in a fax
transmission are read, such as:
•
•
•
•
How many bar codes should be read
What type(s) of bar codes to scan
The field names to into which bar code data will be read
which bar codes can cause a document split
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
205
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Another profile, the Individual Document Profile, controls processing for bar
coded documents when specified characters are decoded from the bar code. There
may be more than one document in the fax. With separate Individual Document
Profiles for each bar code value and its respective document, each document in
the fax can be treated differently with respect to:
•
•
•
•
The name with which the document will be saved to disk
The fields read from the bar code
Processing of faxes received without anticipated faxes
The disposition of the cover page
WorkFlows, another kind of document profile are used by the TargetFax Router
are not directly related to the BarCode Component.
Default Document Profile
When the In Routing option for BarCode/ImageProcessing/Splitting is
selected, and no document profile is specified, the fax is processed by the document profile that appears in the WorkServer Services Doc Profile box.
Click the DocProfile ellipsis to display the document profiles included with TargetFax. Then double-click the Default profile.
Rather than edit options in the default, we suggest that you create a new profile
with fewer active options, such as you see below.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
206
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
When you install the BarCode Component, a document profile called BarCode is
added to the list of document profiles.
Click the Options ellipsis, in the Document Profile Information, to view the
options enabled in this profile. Checked boxes on the left indicate that the associated option is enabled.
• The Lookup value is None. With no lookup, all bar code data is decoded.
• MissingCode: When no bar code is detected on the first page of a fax trans-
mission with bar coded separator pages, the text in this box becomes part of
the file name when the first document split of the transmission is saved to
disk.
• NoCodes invokes the NOCODES Document Profile, when faxes are
received with no bar code. See “NoCodes” on page 213.
• The CoverPage option is set to keep the bar coded cover page with the document it precedes.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
207
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The fax is saved to disk with the file name typed in the FileBase box, followed by
and digits that appear in the Sfx (suffix) value. These digits are incremented with
each fax saved, to ensure unique file names.
The settings for the greyed options, which come from the default document profile have not been overridden in the current document profile and are therefore
operative. When these settings are inappropriate, you must override them in the
default document profile or the document profile specified by the User Profile of
the user who receives the fax.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
208
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
Document Profiles
This section explains in greater detail how the document profiles provided with
TargetFax process received faxes. This information will help you to create your
own document profiles.
TargetFax includes a document profile called “Default”, which decodes bar codes,
and then separates and names the faxes that contain bar codes. When no bar codes
are detected, this default document profile executes the “NOCODES” profile that
provides for processing faxes without bar codes.
You may want to treat some faxes with bar codes differently from others. To do
this, you attach a document profile to the User Profile of the user to whom the fax
will be routed. (See “Receive Faxes with a Custom Document Profile” on
page 226). Faxes with different processing requirements are processed according
to the document profile invoked by the User Profile to which the fax was routed.
Most commonly, TargetFax BarCode installations receive bar coded faxes on DID
lines. Routing of these faxes is controlled by the DID setting in the User Profile.
These User Profile settings include the In Routing options for BarCode/
ImageProcessing/Splitting. To select another profile, check the Use DocProfile
box, and select the profile.
You only need to specify those actions of the custom document profile that should
override the default document profile. If, for example, the default document profile were set to scan three bar codes per page, you wouldn’t have to invoke this
action in the custom document profile.
The Default Document Profile controls processing when the Inbound Routing
BarCode/ImageProcessing/Splitting option is invoked, but no Document Profile
is specified. The Document profile selected for this purpose appears in the The
WorkServer Services Doc Profile box. Any Document Profile can be the Default
Document Profile.
Settings of the default profile will continue to affect processing after another profile has been selected unless the document profile specified in User Profile overrides all of the settings of the default profile.
Attach a Document Profile to User Profile settings as follows:
1. In Edit User Information, click More and then the In Routing ellipsis.
2. Check the BarCode/ImageProcessing/Splitting and Use DocProfile check
boxes.
3. Click the Use DocProfile ellipsis.
4. Select or create a Document Profile. Faxes routed to this user will now be processed according to the options of this Document Profile.
To view the default profile for decoding bar codes, double-click the Default
Decode Options and Actions.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
209
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
5. The Name and Title boxes identify the profile. Click the Options ellipsis, to
see how faxes are processed by this profile.
Field Settings
Field Settings can be used for a variety of purposes. The example below displays
all of the fields that will be contained in one bar code.
For Field Definitions, only the field Name and Type is required.
Document Profile Actions
Actions can be used to assign a value to the variable created for holding the name
with which the fax or e-mail attachment file will be saved to disk. In the example
below, the file will be named NOBARCODE, followed by the date ($D) and time
($T), separated by underscores, when the file was is written to disk,. The file is
written to the default location set in the WorkServer Service or the drive and
directory indicated in the custom path for a Copy To Inbound Routing Option.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
210
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
DocName=expimages_BAD\NOCODES_$D-$t creates a directory called
expimages_Bad, to which the file is written.
DocName=<customer>\$D$t_<PONumber> creates a directory name from
the customer value read from the bar code, begins the file name with the date and
time, followed by the value of the purchase order number read from the bar code.
Document Profile Options
The first seven options control the processing of all received faxes. The second
group of options affects how faxes are named and saved. An option becomes
active when you check the corresponding box, on the left.
The Document Profile Options related to Barcode Component configuration are:
Separator
Multiple documents are sent as one fax transmission by faxing a stack of documents to one fax number. Here you specify which condition is interpreted as the
end of one document in a fax transmission and the beginning of another.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
211
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
To use bar codes as separators, select the BarCode option. When the first page of
each document has a bar code, TargetFax can separate that document from the
others at the page where the bar code is found. We refer to this separation as a
“document split.” These split documents can then be routed, processed and
archived separately. This is accomplished through the use of an Individual Document Profile. See “Individual Document Profiles” on page 217.
Symbology
Select the symbology that this document profile will process. When you select the
All option, TargetFax decodes all bar codes included in your license.
Decode
By default, all bar codes are decoded when this option is enabled. To limit the
number of bar codes read:
1. Check the Decode box.
2. Click the Decode drop-down arrow.
3. When you select the A Maximum of option, an entry box appears where you
can specify the highest number of bar codes that will be decoded per page.
Pages are scanned for bar codes from left to right and top to bottom. Bar codes to
the right of and below the bar code corresponding to the number of BarCodes per
page are not scanned when this option is active.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
212
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
We have found that our customers most often scan only one bar code for each document. In this situation you would Decode a Maximum of 1 BarCode per page.
Lookup
This option controls how much information, scanned from bar code, is checked
against the names of the Individual Document Profile. The bar code is only read
when the scanned value is equal to the name of an Individual Document Profile.
• None: No lookup is performed. With no lookup, all data is decoded for the
bar code(s) scanned.
• Complete Code: The whole bar code is read.
• First Word: Decodes the first field of the bar code
• First: After you select this option, a text entry box appears. This is where
you type how many bar code characters will be looked up, from left to right,
in the first field of the bar code.
• Upto: Spans fields to decode the number of Characters specified from left
to right
Missing Code
Missing Code refers to a bar code that does not appear on the first page of a multiple document fax transmission. If a lookup was performed, this will be a bar
code with a specified value. When multiple bar coded documents are sent in the
same fax, TargetFax splits the documents at the first bar coded page. This option
invokes a document profile, which includes an action that provides a substitute
file name for the initial pages which lack a bar code from which a file name could
be decoded.
TargetFax includes an Individual Document Profile called “Missing” that sets the
value of the barcode variable to “missing,” which can be included in the name
used to save the fax file to disk. See “Individual Document Profiles” on page 217.
NoCodes
When no qualifying bar codes are detected, this option invokes a document profile
with an action that specifies a value for the DocName variable, such as:
DocName=expimages_BAD\NOCODES_$D-$t. This provides a directory
(expimages_BAD) and file name (NOCODES_$D-$t) to which the document is saved.
The nocodes option could also invoke a document profile that sends the administrator an e-mail message when bar codes are not detected within images. Before
you can use this feature, the TargetFax Mail connector must be installed. See “The
TargetFax Mail Connector” on page 172.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
213
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
By default, the NOCODES document profile is selected as the value of NoCodes.
This profile includes the send action shown below. Double-click the NOCODES
document profile, and then click the Actions ellipsis, followed by the Edit Action/
Rule button, to view this action.
• Action/Rule: The job performed; in this case, sending a message
• What: Displays the Topics to Use list, from which you can create, edit and
select the topic sent as notification
• By: The message can be sent by e-mail server (Mail) or as a fax.
• To: Displays the User list, from which you can create, edit and select the
recipient of the notification
• From: The user account from which the e-mail is sent
If you click the Options ellipsis of the NOCODES document profile, you’ll see
that a FileBase of “-” (a hyphen) will be the root of the file name to which the fax
is written. “Sfx=0” means that no suffix is appended to the file name.
Cover Page
If cover pages only contain bar codes used to separate the documents within a
transmission, you might want to Discard these pages, or save them as a Separate
File. The Keep with Body option accepts the cover page as part of the document.
When Binds Document is selected, TargetFax splits the document when the value
of the first bar code on the page changes. Binds to Next and Binds to Previous
attaches the cover page to the document after it and before it respectively.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
214
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
CoverSfx
When cover pages split off by the Separate File option are saved, the characters
typed here are appended to the base file name.
BodySfx
Characters typed here are appended to the base file name for saved body pages
separated from cover pages by the Separate File option for cover pages.
FileBase
Text typed here becomes the root of the file name to which each fax is saved. In
the example above, the variable name “BarCode” is enclosed in brackets to indicate that the Filebase is equal to the value assigned to the BarCode variable.
The hyphens are literals that are inserted before and after the file name root.
Sfx:
“Sfx” (suffix) counters are consecutively numbered digits appended to the FileBase portion of the file name. The use of counters ensures unique file names. If
you select the Literal option, a text box appears, where you can type a text string
suffix to the file name.
TypeSfx:
Use this list box to select the file extension and the graphic format in which the
file is saved.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
215
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The PDFA and TIFA commands create PDF and TIFF formats respectively, and
lead to a secondary action. When one of these extensions is selected, TargetFax
appends all pages with the same identifying bar code to the same document. If a
page with a previously received bar code arrives as part of a latter document, this
page is saved to the existing split TIFF or PDF file. If this option were not
invoked, and two faxes were received, with each containing the same identifying
bar code, the second fax might overwrite the first.
By way of example, if the options were set as shown below, and the value of the
detected bar code was “Targetfax,” a scanned split fax document would be saved
as -Targetfax-01body.tif.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
216
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
Individual Document Profiles
Individual Document profiles describe the information that we expect to find in a
bar code. When all or some portion of the bar code is equal to the name of an Individual Document profile, the lookup succeeds. If a bar code separator was specified in the Document Profile, the document splits above this bar code, and the
actions and options of the Individual Document profile are invoked. This overrides the options and actions of a document profile selected for processing the
document. When the value of the first bar code on a page of the transmission
changes to the name of another Individual Document profile, processing control is
transferred to that profile.
Caution: When Individual Document profile options are left blank, Document
profile options are active.
TargetFax includes two preconfigured Individual Document profiles: ROUTETO
and MISSING.You can access Individual Document profiles in two ways:
• Click the Lookup Values button, on the BARCODE Component main
screen.
• From the WorkServer Services main screen, click Doc Profile, and then filter for Individual Documents
Notice the bar code stripes on the left of the document profile icons. These lines
indicate that this profile uses bar codes to split documents. Document profiles
have one stripe, unless the Separator value, in Edit Individual Options, is None,
in which case the stripe disappears.
MISSING
If a multi-document fax transmission includes bar coded separator pages, but it
has no bar code on the fist page, this Individual Document profile provides the file
name used to save the first document of the series.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
217
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The Actions box indicates that the value of BarCode is “MISSING.” If pages are
read before a bar code is scanned, this value is included in the file name when the
document is saved to disk. The presence of files with this name means that transmissions are missing the first bar code.
ROUTETO
The Decode and Lookup options specify the bar code data that is scanned for
comparison with the names of all Individual Document profiles. When the bar
code scanned has the same value as Name, in the Individual Document Information, the fax transmission splits.
The ROUTETO Individual Document Profile included with TargetFax is an
example of what happens when a bar code scans as “routeto.” You can create Individual Document Profiles that split the fax transmission when the first bar code on
the page has another value.
The RouteTo Individual Document Profile specifies field names for the bar codes
that will be scanned, and combines the field names to create a unique file name, to
which the fax is saved.
Name: The identifier for this Individual Document Profile
Title: A description of what this Individual Document Profile does
Fields: A comma separated list of the expected TargetFax fields to read from bar
codes on the fax, listed in the sequence in which the bar codes are scanned. Faxes
are scanned from left to right, and top to bottom with each 1D bar code containing
one field. With a 2D bar code, you can use this method to list the names of the
fields contained in one bar code.
Actions: A semicolon separated list of instructions to perform after the bar codes
are decoded and saved as TargetFax DCF file fields. If you click the Actions ellipsis of the ROUTETO Individual Document Information, you will see the three
actions performed.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
218
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
The UserInfo actions search the Sender and Recipient records for the FromUser
and User respectively. The BarCode action retrieves the Sender and Recipient
phone numbers, and combines these to create the new value for the BarCode variable. This becomes the Filebase name used to save the split fax to disk. This
scheme assumes that incoming bar codes contain the names of TargetFax users
with phone numbers.
Notice that the Individual Document Options is blank. The Options settings of
the Document Profile will cause the fax to be named and saved correctly; there is
no need to overwrite these settings in the Individual Document Profile.
4. Click OK, to exit the Individual Document Actions.
5. Click OK, to exit Individual Document Information.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
219
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Routing and Splitting Bar Coded Faxes
Before proceeding with these exercises, you should know how to send and receive
faxes, as explained on page 15 of the TargetFax User Guide. Using fields is
explained in “Chapter - 5 Overlay Fields” on page 125, of the TargetFax User
Guide.
In this exercise, you will receive a multi-document fax containing a bar code on
the first page of each document. You will set up TargetFax to split the fax into
documents, save these files to disk, as multi-page PDF documents, and print them.
Most of this process is controlled by system defaults; little customization is
required.
This exercise uses a Document Profile, included with TargetFax, called Default.
Notice that this Document Profile reads all symbologies, decodes all the bar codes
on the page and performs no lookup to identify the bar code as valid.
Document routing to a printer, disk file or e-mail, is set up in the User Profile of
the user to whom the fax is routed. See “FaxServer Service Configuration for
Inbound Routing” on page 151, for an explanation of routing methods. Bar coded
faxes that aren’t routed are processed according to the User Profile settings of the
Default Receiver.
Setup default processing of bar coded faxes received by the default receiver as follows:
1. In the tree view, expand the Users icon, and then click the Default Receiver
ellipsis.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
220
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
2. Click the
Add Individual(s) button, on the toolbar.
3. For the Name, type BarCode.
4. Create a Group called Routing.
5. Click the More button.
6. Click the In Routing ellipsis, to display the User Routing Options.
7. Check the boxes for BarCode/ImageProcessing/Splitting and Copy to
Multi-Page PDF.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
221
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
8. Continue to click OK until you return to Users Class.
9. In the File menu, click Save Users Class Info. BarCode is now the default
receiver. Faxes received by this default user will be processed according to the
Routing Options of the BarCode user.
Test the Routing Options
To send bar coded pages that test document splitting, you can make your own
pages, or use sample files, included with your TargetFax.
To add a BarCode Test recipient:
1. Start the TargetFax Client.
2. Click The To... button, to display the Recipients list.
3. Click the Add Individuals button, on the toolbar.
4. Type the Name, Phone and the FaxNum of your TargetFax Server. The
remaining recipient information is optional.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
222
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
5. Click the Add and Close buttons.
To send the bar code test fax:
1. While the Recipients list remains active, double-click the Barcode Test recipient, and then the OK button.
2. Browse to BC123456789 Sample Barcode, at C:\TargetFax\Install\Addins\BarCode, and add it to the library.
3. Type the Title, Pages and click the Add button.
4. In the Attachments section, use the library button to add the following attachments, and click OK:
•
•
•
•
BC123456789 Separator Bar Code Page
Demo Sample Demonstration File, in the attachments library
A second instance of BC123456789 Separator Bar Code Page
A second instance of Demo Sample Demonstration File
5. Click Send.
After about a minute, you can view the received faxes as follows:
1. Right-click the TargetFax tray icon.
2. Click the Fax Manager command, to display the Event Viewer.
3. In the User list, click the BARCODE user.
4. Select the fax you sent, and click the View Document button, in the toolbar.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
223
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
224
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
The image is split into two faxes named I0000109 -1234567890-0.pdf and I00001097-01234567890-02.pdf, which were saved to the default directory
(C:\EXTPDF). See “Set Up Default Inbound Routing to a Directory” on page 138.
The file name consists of three hyphen separated elements:
• I00001097: This is the value of FaxKey that TargetFax uses as a default file
name for files saved as PDF. See “Set Up Default Inbound Routing to a
Directory” on page 138
• 0123456789: The value scanned from the bar code, enclosed by hyphens
with the FileBase option. See “Document Profile Options” on page 178.
• 02: The 2 digit counter suffix added to file names. See “Document Profile
Options” on page 178.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
225
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Receive Faxes with a Custom Document Profile
You assign document profiles to process faxes routed to a user by the channel,
DTMF or DID routing methods. To create a special purpose user for processing
routed faxes, follow these steps:
1. In the System Administrator tree view, click the Users icon.
2. Click the User Profiles button.
3. Click the Add Individuals toolbar button, and then the More button.
4. Type the user’s name, fax number and other required information. As faxes
will be routed to this user by DID, be sure to type the DID numbers in the DID
box.
5. Click the In Routing ellipsis.
6. Click the Overlay FileName on Image ellipsis.
7. Check the Use Custom Overlay box, and click the corresponding ellipsis.
8. Click a Background form, and then click the OK button.
9. For the purposes of this exercise, check the BarCode/ImageProcessing/Splitting, and Use DocProfile boxes.
10. Click the Use DocProfile ellipsis.
11. In Document Profile to Use, you can select a profile, or click the Add New
document profile icon to create a new profile. Double-click Default Decode
Options and Actions. Then click the Options ellipsis.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
226
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
The profile options are those of the document profile called Default. Immediately
after TargetFax is installed, this is the Document Profile, displayed in WorkServer
Service, that processes faxes that require Barcode/ImageProcessing/Splitting, but
have no Document Profile specified. To add an option, check the box, and select
or type the option settings. Changes made here affect the processing of all bar
coded faxes processed with the Default Document Profile.
Faxes sent to this user’s DID number will now be processed according to the
options and actions of the selected Document Profile.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
227
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Advanced BarCode Options
Advanced BarCode options include the ability to scan bar codes for anticipated
information, create bar codes as overlay fields, and process faxes based on the values read from bar codes. Before you can use these features, your license must
include Advanced BarCode Features.
Set Up a Document Profile to Do Bar Code Lookups
The previous document splitting exercise split the document each time a bar code
was encountered. As the only bar codes found were those placed on separator
pages, this worked well. When a document contains additional bar codes, you
must define a rule that splits the document only when bar codes with a predetermined value are read. Otherwise, the fax would split each time a bar code is read.
Find an Individual Document Profile
An Individual Document Profile with the same name as the value of the bar code
serves to identify that bar code as the location of a split. If you click the Lookup
Values button, on the BarCode Component main screen, you’ll see the available
Individual Document Profiles. Because TargetFax includes a ROUTETO Individual Document Profile, if you insert a bar code with the value of “Routeto,” at the
top of each document in the transmission, the lookup option can be set to cause a
split above this bar code.
Create a new Document Profile
Create a new document profile to define the scanned fields as follows:
1. In the WorkServer Services pane, click the DocProfile ellipsis.
2. In the Document Profile to Use tool bar, click the Add New Document Profile
button.
3. Type the Name and Title information.
Assign Field Names to the Values Scanned from the Bar Codes
This process provides field names for the data scanned from the bar codes.
1. Click the Fields ellipsis.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
228
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
2. Click the Add New Field button, to add a field definition.
3. Type the Name for a field called Barcode. Then click Add and Close.
4. Click the Add New Field button. Type the field information for the FromUser
field, and left justify it.
5. Right-justify the User field. For the List/Values, type users. When finished, the value fields will appear as below.
6. Click OK, to return to the document profile.
Actions
This action searches the user and sender data bases for matches to the scanned bar
code values, returns the phone numbers of the scanned sender and recipient and
combines these fields to create a file name suffix to which the fax is saved to disk.
This lookup only succeeds when the data scanned from the bar codes matches the
database. Superfluous bar codes are ignored. Create these actions as follows.
1. Click the Actions ellipsis.
2. Click the New Action Rule button.
This action finds the fax sender record for the user whose bar code was read.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
229
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
3. For the Action/Rule, select GetUserInfo(Params).
4. In the Params box, type FromUser, click Add and then Close.
This action finds the fax recipient record for the user whose bar code was scanned.
5. Click the New Action Rule button.
6. For the Action/Rule, select GetUserInfo(Params).
7. In the Params box, type User, click Add, and then Close.
This action combines the phone numbers from the sender and recipient records,
with a hyphen between them, and assigns this string to the variable “BarCode.”
This value is used at the start of the file name with which the split document is
saved to disk.
8. Click the New Action Rule button.
9. For the Action/Rule, select Custom(Action).
10. For the Action, type BarCode=<FromPhone>-<ToPhone>, click Add,
and then Close.
11. Click OK and Add.
When finished, the actions will appear as shown below.
Set Document Profile Options
1. Click the Options ellipsis.
2. Check the Lookup box.
3. In the Lookup list box, click Complete Code. All of the characters in each
scanned bar code will now be read.
4. Set the remaining options to appear as shown below, and click OK.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
230
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
5. Continue to click OK until you return to the BARCODE Component pane.
6. Click Add and OK.
7. Click the Lookup Values button, and select the ROUTETO Individual Document Profile.
8. In the File menu, click the Save BarCode Modules Group Info command. A
document will now split off each time a fax starts with the bar code that means
ROUTETO.
Create a BarCode Form
Create a bar code separator cover page, with overlain bar codes as follows:
1. Start the Client.
2. Click the Cover ellipsis, and then one of the cover pages. Cover1 works well
for this exercise.
3. Click the View document button, on the toolbar.
4. Click the Overlay Fields button.
5. Click the Overlay Fields arrow.
6. Click the Literal Text... command.
7. Type the text to overlay on the cover page, and click OK. Since this is the first
bar code on the page, type the name of an Individual Document Profile.
8. For this exercise, click the rubber stamp cursor to the right of “Originated by.”
Choose a spot with enough blank space for the bar code to print.
9. Right-click the overlay, to edit the field properties.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
231
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
10. Click the Font button.
11. Change the Size to 18, and the Code Font to the bar code font you installed.
Then click OK.
12. Click Close.
13. Add two more bar code font overlays, for User and routeto, by selecting
the Other Field... command from the Overlay Fields list. Format the fields, as
previously described. The TargetFax viewer should appear as shown below.
14. Click the Save Image button, and save the file to the file name
RouteTo.tiff, in the Covers directory.
15. Close the viewer, click the Add New Cover page button, find
RouteTo.tiff, and double-click it.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
232
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
16. Type a Title, and 80 for the Max Cols of the cover page.
17. Type RouteTo in the Custom Fields. This enables you to type the value of
the bar code at the time you send this document.
18. Click Add and OK, to return to the Client main screen.
In the example above, the value of the User bar code comes from the database.
There may however be occasions when you wish to type values for more than one
bar code. Add multiple custom fields as follows:
1. Return to the Cover Page Information for COVER1.
2. Click the Custom Fields ellipsis.
3. Click to Add New Field toolbar button to display Add New Cover Page Field
4. Change the value of Name to the name of the next bar code on the cover page.
Note: Keep in mind that bar codes are scanned from top to bottom and left to
right.
5. Click the Add button.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each bar code in the document.
Test the BarCode Form
1. From the Client main screen, select the BarCode Test Recipient, the RouteTo
CoverPage and the DEMOMRG library document.
2. Click the Custom Fields button, to display the Custom Field Values.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
233
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
3. For the RouteTo value, type the name of a TargetFax user, and click OK.
4. Click OK, and then the Send button.
The received fax is redirected from the default receiver. If you check the received
faxes of the TargetFax user whose name you typed in the RouteTo box, you will
see the fax you just sent.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
234
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
Sending a Notification when No BarCodes are Detected
This section explains how to automate e-mail notifications when faxes without bar
codes are received. The Send Actions that perform this task are preconfigured in
the NOCODES profile.
The BarCode Component is preconfigured to use the default document profile for
faxes that are not processed with a custom document profile. Because the Default
document profile calls the NOCODES Document Profile when you check the
BarCode/ImageProcessing/Splitting Inbound Routing option, in the User Profile of the user to whom the fax was routed, an e-mail is sent when no bar codes
are detected in a fax routed to this user. This section explains how to select the
recipient of the e-mail.
Acces and attach a document profile to a User Profile as follows:
1. Click the System Administrator Users icon, in the tree view.
2. Click the User Profiles button.
3. Double-click a user account to which bar coded faxes will be delivered. Then
click the More button. In the example below, the BarCode user receives faxes
sent with a DID of 0001.
4. Click the In Routing ellipsis.
5. Check the boxes for BarCode/ImageProcessing/Splitting and Use Custom
DocProfile, and click OK.
6. Click the Use DocProfile ellipsis.
At this stage, two general approaches are available for attaching the Send Action
to this User Profile: You can select either of the document profiles included with
TargetFax; both of which include the Send Action, or you can create a new document profile that includes the Send Action, as described below.
1. In the Document Profile to Use box, click the Add New Profile tool bar icon.
2. Type the Name and Title of the new document profile.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
235
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
3. Click the Options ellipsis, to display the options for the new document profile.
4. Check the NoCodes option to control processing of faxes received without bar
codes.
5. Click the NoCodes ellipsis and double-click the NOCODES Document profile, to display the NOCODES profile.
6. Click the Actions ellipsis, to display the Document Profile Actions information.
7. Click the Edit Action/Rule button. From here, you can change the sender,
recipient or content of the message.
8. By default, the notification is sent to the Administrator user. Click the To ellipsis, select the user to whom the e-mail will be sent, and click OK.
9. Click the Add button.
10. Return to the System Administrator main screen.
11. In the File menu, click the Save BarCode Modules Group Info command.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
236
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
See “Document Profile Options” on page 178 for configuration instructions.
Remember that you must have the Targetfax Mail Connector installed and
licensed before you can send notifications.
Testing Notification Setup
To test notification setup:
1. Fax the Demo Sample Demonstration and Demorge Sample Merge Demonstration files to the TargetFax Server while the BARCODE user is the default
receiver. Neither of these documents has a bar code.
2. Click the Fax Manager button, and select the BARCODE user, in the User
list.
3. Click Received faxes, and double-click the fax. The overlay now includes the
FaxKey, followed by the -NOCODES text.
4. In the User list, click the user who sent the notification (usually the TargetFax
Mail Administrator), and view the e-mail message sent.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
237
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Working with the Custom/Routing Rules
This section explains how to edit TargetFax rules.
To access the Custom/Routing Rules:
1. Click WorkServer Services, in the System Administrator tree view.
2. In the Custom/Routing Rules tab, double-click the Inbox Rule.
3. Click the Show Details button.
The Custom Routing Rules section of Edit Custom/Routing Rule Information
lists the inbound routing rules. Double-click a rule to display an Edit Custom Rule
Condition box, such as that shown below. Click Show Details to see all of
it.These dialogue boxes include toolbar icons that perform as they do in all TargetFax Component. There are also features that are unique to WorkFlow customization.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
238
C h a p t e r - 9 T h e Ta r g e t F a x B a r C o d e C o m p o n e n t
In the Custom Routing Rules section of the Edit Custom/Routing Rule Information, notice the column of green check marks, on the left side. These appear next
to each active rule. To turn off the rule, double-click the Edit Custom Rule Condition screen above, and remove the check mark in the upper-left corner.
If you scroll to the right, you’ll notice the ellipses that follow some Actions/
Rules. These ellipses indicate that there are more parameters before or after the
visible parameters.
Custom Rule Toolbar:Rule Icons
Add New
To create a new rule or parameter, you
select a rule or parameter, and click
this button. You then edit the selected
rule or parameter to create a new one
that appears below the one you
selected.
Delete
Removes rules or parameters
Edit
Used to change the selected rule or
parameter
Move Up
and Down
Moves the selected rule or parameter
up or down in the order of execution
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
239
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Reading‘Bar Codes that Contain Multiple Fields
The Split field action is the preferred method for separating fields combined in a
single bar code. The DocInfo Individual Document field below uses a Split field
Action to scan a bar code into two fields that are created by this action: DocType
and EmpNum. The value enclosed in single quotes, in this case a space, specifies
the character(s) in the bar code that separate the two fields. If a third field, such as
date of hire were also scanned, the action would be Split(’ ‘,DocType, EmpNum,
HireDate)
For some bar code fonts, such as Free 3 of 9, the space is not a permissible caracter. Underscores are therefore used to separate words. TargetFax edits this font
to convert underscores to spaces. For this reason, though the bar code contains
underscores, the Split action uses spaces to separate words in the bar code.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
240
Chapter - 10 The Image PRO Component
The Image Pro Component includes many utilities for the reorientation, repair and
enhancement of images. A few of the most popular features are:
•
•
•
•
Removal of punch holes
Flipping faxes that were sent upside-down
Removal of scan lines
Resolution enhancement
This chapter explains how it install, license and configure the Image PRO component. It also covers routing of received faxes to processing by the Image PRO
component.
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Image Pro Component Installation
Import the Image Pro Component
Though the Image Pro Component is copied to the server when TargetFax is
installed, you must import it into TargetFax, license it and install it before you can
use it. Perform the licensing and installation steps at the TargetFax Server console.
Import the Image Pro Component as follows:
1. Start the System Administrator.
2. In the File menu, click Import New Component. This displays the Import/
Install TargetFax Component box.
The TargetFax License Manager displays after you import the component. You
can also start the license manager by clicking Licenses…, in the Tools menu.
Note: You must license the Image Pro component at the server where the TargetFax WorkServer Service is installed.
To obtain a license key by e-mail, complete the following procedure:
1. Click the TargetFax License Manager
zation code to the Clipboard.
Copy button. This moves the authori-
2. Open an e-mail message, and address it to license@otgt.com.
3. Paste (Ctrl+v) the code into the e-mail message. Also include your name, company name and the name of your One Touch Sales Representative.
4. Send the message.
Enter your license keys as follows:
1. In the e-mail message you receive from One Touch Global Technologies, select
a license key with your mouse. If you have more than one license key, select
the code that begins with the letter “B.”
2. Copy (Ctrl+c) the license key.
3. In the Module list box, select TargetFax Image Pro Component.
4. Click the
Paste button.
5. Click Apply, and then OK.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
242
Chapter - 10 The Image PRO Component
The Image Pro Component is displayed beneath Applications, in the tree view.
Configuration options appear, to the right, in the Image Pro Component pane.
Install the Clear Image Run Time
If you installed the Clear Image Run Time for the PDF2TIF Component or the
BarCode Component, you can skip this step. Otherwise, install the Clear Image
Run Time as follows:
1. In the Image Pro Component pane, click the Install button.
2. Click the I agree button, and then Next.
3. Restart the computer before using the Image PRO component.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
243
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Document Profiles
TargetFax uses three levels of profiles to control the reading of bar codes, processing of images and the splitting of fax transmissions into separate documents:
• Default Document Profile: Faxes sent without routing numbers are processed by this profile.
• Document Profile: Faxes sent to users can be assigned document profiles
that control only the processing of faxes sent to that user.
• Individual Document Profile: When the first bar code on a page is equal to
the name of an Individual Document Profile, a document split occurs above
the bar code, and the actions and options of the Individual Document Profile are invoked. This overrides the options and actions of the document
profile. When the value of the first bar code on a page of the transmission
changes to the name of another Individual Document Profile, processing
control is transferred to that profile.
The WorkServer Services Doc Profile box displays the Default Document Profile. Using the Fax Manager, you can view these faxes in the received events of
the TargetFax default receiver. Faxes routed to users are processed according to
the actions and options of the Document Profile attached to the corresponding
User Profile.
Click the DocProfile ellipsis to display the document profiles included with TargetFax. Double-click the Default profile.
Click the Options ellipsis to view the options enabled in this profile. A checked
box, on the left, indicates that the associated option is enabled.
You assign document profiles to process faxes routed to a user by the channel,
DTMF or DID routing methods. To create a special purpose user for processing
routed faxes, follow these steps:
1. In the System Administrator tree view, click the Users icon.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
244
Chapter - 10 The Image PRO Component
2. Click the User Profiles button.
3. Click the Add Individuals toolbar button, and then the More button.
4. Type the user’s name, fax number and other required information. As faxes
will be routed to this user by DID, channel or DTMF, be sure to type the numbers in the DID box.
5. Click the In Routing ellipsis.
6. For the purposes of this exercise, check the BarCode/Image Processing/Splitting and Use DocProfile boxes.
When BarCode/Image Processing/Splitting is checked and Use Custom
DocProfile is clear, faxes routed to this user are processed using the default document profile displayed in DocProfile, on the WorkServer Services main screen. In
In this exercise, another document profile is selected.
7. Click the Use DocProfile ellipsis.
8. In Document Profile to Use list, you could select a profile, or click the Add
New Document Profile icon to create a new profile. Double-click the Default
Decode Options and Actions document profile. Then click the Options ellipsis.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
245
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Check the Image PRO box, to enable the default image modification options. To
view or change the image modification options, click the Image PRO ellipsis.
All modification options are inactive. Default parameter settings are provided for
those options that require parameters.
To save changes to these options, for use when creating another document profile,
click the SaveDflts button. This creates a saved system-wide list of image modification options that is updated to the last displayed settings each time you click the
SaveDflts button. You can then restore these settings to another document profile
by clicking the LoadDflts button.
When you create image modification options for a new document profile, the
options do not appear checked. Only the parameters to the lower options are
retained from the default setting.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
246
Chapter - 10 The Image PRO Component
Image Processing Options
Auto Deskew Image: Deskews image to the nearest vertical or horizontal axis, on
the basis of measurements taken of the overall image object. It is also possible to
use a zone as a reference for the measurement, in which case the Parent of the
zone object is deskewed based on image data inside the zone.
Auto Rotate Image: If an image contains enough of textual elements, image is set
in a position where text lines run horizontally, and read from left to right. If an
image contains mostly graphical objects, like lines, the image is set in a position
with the most lines running horizontally.
Remove Background Halftone: Erase light shading from image background
Remove Punch Holes: Erase marks caused by punched holes
Remove Blank Fax Lines: Only blank (all white) horizontal lines created by
communication error are removed
Remove Fax Header: Erases uniform text objects, on a single fax scan line, at the
upper edge of the image. Fax headers in re-scanned or deskewed images cannot be
removed.
Convert Standard Fax to Fine: Convert standard resolution fax images to fine
resolution
Auto Clear Noise: This option removes specks from the image. The parameter
specifies the maximum horizontal or vertical size, in pixels, of the noise objects
that are erased.
Auto Clear Background: White background scanned as gray scale and color typically produces off-white background. This option convert all pixels brighter than
specified threshold to pure white. This makes image more closely resemble the
original document. This method only works on gray scale and color images.
While a threshold value of zero does not change an image, a value of one hundred
sets all image pixels to white. We recommend a setting of thirty (30%) for this
threshold.
Auto Invert Image: Images are converted to black-on-white. After you check this
option, you must type the minimum percentage of black pixels that must be
detected in the image before inversion occurs.
Auto Invert Blocks: White-on-black blocks are often used to emphasize text for
human readers. This option converts white-on-black text to black-on-white text,
thus allowing OCR programs to read the text For the first parameter, type the Minimum width of the blocks that are reversed,. Type a comma, and then the minimum height, in pixels, of the blocks that are reversed.
Reregister Image: Use to adjust the margin size. Parameters are the number of
pixels for the left and top margins, separated by commas.
Crop Image: The number of pixels removed from the left, top, right and bottom
margins in pixels, separated by commas.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
247
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Remove Borders: Extracts borders from document images. Options for the first
parameter are:
• 1=Remove borders only
• 2=Remove borders and deskew
• 3=Remove borders, deskew, and crop
The extraction options are 1 for faster border extraction, and 2 for cleaner border
extraction.
Resize Image to Page: PageSize, [PageOrientation], [ImageAlignment], [Width],
[Height], [Unit] PageSize:4=Custom image size
5=Image size before
image is modified
10=Letter size
11=Legal size
12=Ledger size
20=Page size
Delete Lines: Delete lines, such as scan lines, and reconnect intersected objects:
The first parameter is the direction of the lines:
•
•
•
•
0=Unknown
1=Vertical lines
2=Horizontal lines
3=Both vertical and horizontal lines
Type a comma, and then the repair option: 0 = no repair and 1 = repair.
Straighten Lines: Find and straighten image lines: Type on of the following line
types:
•
•
•
•
0=Unknown
1=Vertical lines
2=Horizontal lines
3=Both vertical and horizontal lines
Smooth Characters: Smooths the edges of characters. Type 1, to make the character edges darker, or 2, to make the character edges lighter.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
248
Chapter - 11 Database Maintenance
This chapter explains the usage of the following utilities:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Database backup and repair
Update databases from Access 97 to Access 2000
Export files for import to later TargetFax versions
Delete sent and received faxes
Export and import
Installing and Using the SQL Server Components to access
SQL databases
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Database Maintenance and File Backups
Database corruption can occur easily, and is normally easy to recover from without data loss. The most frequent cause of database corruption is a disconnection of
the database while it is still open. In addition to repairing databases, you can also
compact your job databases. This is an easy way to keep your job databases small
and efficient. If you have deleted several jobs or recipients, this is a good time to
compact the Jobs database. Each time you compact a database, a copy of your old
database is saved with an extension of MD1.
Repair and Compact a Database
Repair the Jobs database as follows:
1. Quit all TargetFax programs on the network and at the server.
Note: The Repair and Compact operations succeed only when no more than one
computer is running TargetFax software.
2. Start the System Administrator.
3. Stop the WorkServer Service.
4. In the menu bar, select Tools |Database Utilities|Compact and Repair Database.
5. Double-click the Jobsdb.mdb database.
You will be informed that the database is repaired, and asked if you would like to
compact it.
6. Click Yes.
Update Database to Version 5
This utility converts an Access 97 database to an Access 2000 database. This
increases the database size limitation from one to two gigabytes. Convert a TargetFax database from an earlier version for use with TargetFax 5 as follows:
1. Quit all TargetFax programs on the network.
2. Stop the TargetFax WorkServer and BoardServer Services
3. Start the System Administrator.
4. In the menu bar, select Tools |Database Utilities|Convert Database to Current Version.
5. Browse to, and double-click the Jobsdb.mdb database.
Conversion is confirmed.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
250
C h a p t e r - 11 D a t a b a s e M a i n t e n a n c e
Database and File Backups
Certain files, such as primary database files, should be included in your standard
backup process. For single user systems, or for networks with no automated
backup procedures, copies of key databases and files (below) should be maintained on a redundant drive, or stored on a write enabled CD-ROM, as frequently
as necessary to ensure your that data is secure and up to date. At a minimum, we
recommend that you back up the following files:
Key Databases and Files
\TargetFax\
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
\Archive\*.*
\Data\*.*
\Info\*.*
\Jobs\*.MDB
\Logs\*.INI
\Logs\*.STA
\Library\*.*
\System\*.*
\OCR\*.*
\Users\*.*
\Winnt\
• \OTIS.INI
• \OTSARC.INI
Other files as needed
TargetFax writes many temporary files that need not be saved.These files have
the following locations and extensions:
\TargetFax\
• \Jobs\ Exclude *.TIF, TXT and DCF files to avoid large backups
• \Logs\ Exclude *.log files
• \Oldlogs Exclude *.log files.
Log Files and INI Files
TargetFax retains multiple log files based on workstation and function. You can
select log levels that record the desired level of system activity. Log levels are
ERROR ONLY, DEBUG, INFO, and NONE.
• INFO: Standard indication of events, actions and warnings. This is the recommended level of detail.
• DEBUG: Use this setting only if instructed to do so by TargetFax technical
support.
• ERROR: Logs errors only.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
251
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
To change the log level, click a service in the tree view, click Logging Information, in the Tools menu, and then change the Log Level.
Logs are stored in the \TargetFax\Logs directory. Below is a guide to TargetFax
files and naming conventions (assume the workstation name is DEV1):
Please consult with One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. before attempting any
OTOTGT-DEV1J
.log
Broadcast Manager log
OTOTGT-DEV1M
.log
Mail Merge information log (stored in \OTLocal\Logs)
OTOTGT-DEV1P
.log
Print capture log
OTOTGT-DEV1SA
.log
System Administrator log
FAX1S
.log
Fax Server/Service log for FaxServer FAX1
WORK1S
.Log
WorkServer/Service log for WorkServer WORK1
OTDEV1
.sta
Dynamic processing file for this workstation
FAX1
.sta
Dynamic processing file for this server
OTIS
.ini
Local Windows directory file to locate TargetFax
files
OTSITE
.ini
Global and dynamic definition file for all workstations
OTMAIN
.ini
Primary static settings for system
OTDEV1
.ini
Local settings for this workstation
FAX1
.ini
Settings for each FaxServer by friendly name
INI edits. These files should typically never be edited directly without specific
instructions from our technical support department.
Import/Export
The TargetFax Import/Export feature copies and retrieves TargetFax database
entries for the items listed below.
Attachments
Topics
Cover Pages
Recipients
Senders
Headers/Footers
Users
Overlays
Dialing Plans
Database entries are insufficient to restore attachments, overlays and cover pages;
these documents are TIFF files that are not exported. The TIFF files must be
backed up and restored as a separate operation.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
252
C h a p t e r - 11 D a t a b a s e M a i n t e n a n c e
You can import and export from any screen that includes the Import and Export
toolbar icons. These icons are only visible to users with TargetFax Administrator
privileges.
Import/Export feature is useful in the following applications:
• Importing customized files received from One Touch Global Technologies
Professional Services
• Upgrading TargetFax
• Moving files from one TargetFax Server to another
File Export
When you click the export button, you are promoted to export either the selected
item, or all items. You then save the file(s) to your choice of directories. Library
entries are saved as one export file, with the.txt extension.
File Import
Click the File Import button, then browse to and import a file. Imported files do
not overwrite existing entries. To replace the current library entry, delete it and
import its replacement.
Import/Export Rules
When you upgrade TargetFax, your rules are not changed. You can
change the rules by importing rules exported from an earlier TargetFax version or received from TargetFax Professional Services. The
Import and Export buttons for rules are in the toolbar of the System
Administrator Server Setup tab.
When you import rules, you are prompted to overwrite existing
rules and add new rules (Click Yes), or to import new rules only.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
253
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Import/Export Projects
TargetFax Professional Services creates projects consisting of the topics, recipients, users, library documents, overlays, document profiles etc. that address the
communication requirements of organizations. These projects are imported as follows:
1. Expand Databases, in the System Administrator tree view, to display the Master database.
2. Click the Master Database.
3. In the Tools menu, click Database Utilities and then Import MASTER database.
4. Find and open the Export Database File (.edb) file.
Fax Server Maintenance
Please consult with the vendor from whom you purchased your fax server. If you
purchased your fax server or fax boards directly from One Touch Global Technologies, Inc. (OTGT), you may be eligible for support on this equipment and software. Valid support contracts from OTGT are product specific. Purchasing a
Support and Maintenance Contract for TargetFax software does not entitle the
end-user to support on other products. To order a support and maintenance contract, call (949) 270-0300.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
254
C h a p t e r - 11 D a t a b a s e M a i n t e n a n c e
Installing and Using the SQL Server Components
Since its initial development, TargetFax has stored its data in Microsoft Access
databases. This includes such information as users, recipients, the Do Not Send
list, and information about sent and received faxes. Starting with Version 5, data
from any or all of your databases can also be stored in Microsoft SQL Express and
SQL formats.
The SQL Server Connection also enables TargetFax installations that use Access
Databases for internal storage to import SQL data sources.
This section explains how to use SQL Express and SQL Server for storing your
TargetFax databases. It also tells you how to import SQL Express and SQL files to
TargetFax Data Sources for imports, lookups and updates.
Installing a new TargetFax System
Follow the procedures in the TargetFax System Administration and Installation
Guide to install or Update the TargetFax System. If you are upgrading TargetFax
to a version that supports SQL databases, see “Chapter - 14 Upgrading TargetFax”
on page 293.
Updating an Installed TargetFax System
Note: The following procedure resets workflow rules to the default settings of the
version to which you have upgraded. This will overwrite any custom rules you
have created. If you have a WorkFlow license, and have customized your workflow rules, you may wish to consult with TargetFax Professional Services before
proceeding.
Perform the following steps to ensure your system configuration is updated to the
latest values:
1. Click the WorkServices leaf, in the tree view, and then click the Restore
Default Settings command on the Tools Menu:
2. Click OK, to confirm resetting your rules.
3. Click Yes, to update fields and values.
4. Click Yes, to import all work rules.
5. Click the icon of, and restore the default settings for each of the remaining tree
view icons (Users, Databases, MAIN and JOBS).
License the SQL Server Connection
Before the SQL Server Connector can be used, it must be licensed. The License
Manager should appear automatically. If you choose to apply the license code
later, you can start the License Manager in the System Administrator Tools menu
as follows:
1. Click Licences in the System Administrator Tools menu.
2. Select the SQL Server Connector module.
3. Now request a license code as described in “Licensing Manager” on page 24.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
255
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Download and Install the Microsoft SQL Express and Studio
If you do not have Microsoft SQL installed on the TargetFax server, you need to
download and install the Net FrameWorks3 SQL Express and Studio before you
configure the TargetFax Server for SQL. We hope that the following procedures
for navigating Microsoft’s Web site are helpful to you. Please keep in mind that
Microsoft may have changed some of these pages.
Important: These programs can only be installed on Windows Server 2003.
To download.Net FrameWork3:
1. Browse to http://msdn.microsoft.com/svideo/express/sql/download/.
2. Click the Download .NetFramework 2.0 link.
3. In the Announcing Frame 3.0 topic, click the Download the new release
link.
4. Click the Run or Download button.
5. Click Run.
6. Accept the license agreement, and click Install.
To install the SQL Express:
1. Go to the http://msdn.microsoft.com/vstudio/express/ page.
2. Beneath the Install Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express edition link, click
the Download link.
3. Click the Run button.
4. Register SQL Server Express, or bypass registration.
5. Beneath the Install Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express edition link, click
the Download link.
6. Click Run to start the SQL Server 2005 Express edition.
7. Accept the licence agreement, and then click the Next button.
8. Click Install.
9. After the required components are installed, click Next.
10. Click Next, to install the prerequisites.
11. Click Next, to start the installation wizard.
12. After the configuration check, click Next.
13. Type your Name, your Company, and then click Next.
14. Expand Data Services, Client Components and Software Development kit.
Then set each branch to Install Entire Features on Local Hard Drive, and
click Next.
15. In most cases, you can click Next to accept Windows Authentication Mode.
16. Select your Error and Usage Report settings, and click Next.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
256
C h a p t e r - 11 D a t a b a s e M a i n t e n a n c e
17. Click Install.
18. Click Next.
19. Click Finish.
To Install the SQL Server Management Studio Express:
1. Return to the http://msdn.microsoft.com/vstudio/express/sql/download page.
2. Beneath the SQL Server 2005 Management Studio Express link, click the
Download link.
3. You may be prompted to register the software.
4. Beneath the SQL Server 2005 Management Studio Express link, click the
Download link.
5. Click the Run button, to start the installation.
6. Click Next, to start SQL Server Management Studio Express Setup.
7. Accept the license agreement, and click Next.
8. Type your Name, your Company, and then click Next.
9. In the Management Studio Express list box, click This feature and all subfeatures will be installed on local hard drive, and click Next.
10. Click Install.
Select Services and Connection Types
Enable SQL Server Express to search for remote SQL server connections as follows:
1. To Open the SQL Server 2005 Surface Area Configuration click All Programs|Microsoft SQL Server 2005|ConfigurationTools|SQL Server 2005
Surface Area Configuration|Surface Area Configuration for Surfaces and
Networks.
2. Click the Remote Connections button.
3. In the right plane, click Local and Remote Connections.
4. In the tree view, click SQL Server Browser.
5. Click the Start button, and then OK.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
257
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Set Up the SQL Server Connection
By default, TargetFax stores data in Acces databases. To use SQL Express or SQL
Server you must first connect to the SQL databases. The you import your Access
data into the SQL databases, and tell TargetFax to switch to using the SQL databases.
1. Click the Databases leaf, in the System Administrator tree view.
2. Click the SQL Server ellipsis, to display the SQL Server Information.
3. Click the SQL Server list box to display the SQL servers detected on the network. This is where you select the SQL server to which you wish to connect.
For the purpose of this exercise, click the entry that starts with your server
name and ends with SQLEXPRESS.
4. Select your authentication method. If your TargetFax Server is set up for NT
Authorization, the Use NT Authentication with current network Login ID
option is recommended.
Note: TargetFax requires that all standard TargetFax databases be on the same
SQL server, and that each uses the same logon account. You may wish to use the
“sa” account to create these databases, and then set up security for databases created by this account. You could also create a user group of TargetFax users and
use NT Authentication for this Group.
5. Click Ok. If TargetFax connects to the specified SQL Server, the System
Administrator Databases screen is restored.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
258
C h a p t e r - 11 D a t a b a s e M a i n t e n a n c e
The SQL DB Path may be used to specify the location where the TargetFax databases are stored. In general, it should be left blank, in which case the default path
for the Server is used.
Creating the TargetFax SQL Server Databases
This exercise shows how to create the three Main TargetFax databases (Master,
DNS and Clients) in the SQL Server, each with its own schema or structure.
Broadcast Manager users must also create the JobsDB SQL Server.
1. Expand the Main leaf, beneath Databases, in the tree view.
2. In the Default Type list box, select the type of the database you will create. For
this exercise, click SQLExpress.
3. In the File menu, click the Add New MAIN Database command, to create the
first of our SQL databases.
One naming scheme for the new SQL databases is to prefix each database with
“SQL”, e.g.: SQLMASTER. SQLDNS, SQLCLIENTS. Another possibility is
to provide a prefix that references the TargetFax Site to which they belong. If for
example, you were setting up databases for a TargetFax QA server, you might
want to call them QAMASTER, QADNS, QACLIENTS. This convention is a
good choice for organizations that have more than one TargetFax Site. You should
also notice that TargetFax always prefixes database names with the letters “TF.”
4. Type the Name you have chosen for the Master SQL database.
Notice that the Path changes to indicate the location of the SQL Server instance
and the name of the new database.
5. Select the Schema for the new database. Be sure that Master is selected.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
259
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
6. Click OK. A new leaf for the new database is added to the tree view.
7. Repeat this process for the other two MAIN databases. Be sure to select the
Schema value that corresponds to the name of the database you are converting.
If you have the Broadcast Manager, repeat this process to create the SQL JOBS
database. When all of these SQL databases are created, your tree view should look
something like this:
Export Access Data to SQL
Export the databases as follows:
1. Click the MASTER leaf in the tree view.
2. Click Tools|Database Utilities|Export Master Database.
3. Click Save to export the data.
4. At the confirmation prompt, click OK.
5. Repeat this process for the remaining tree view (DNS and CLIENTS) databases, and the JOBSDB database, if you use the Broadcast Manager.
Import the exported data into the new databases as follows:
1. Click the SQLMASTER leaf, in the tree view. You may have exported the
master database to another file name.
2. Click Tools|Database|Utilities|Import SQlMASTER Database....
3. Select the .edb file you exported from the Access Master database, and click
Open.
4. Repeat this process to import the .edb files you exported from the DNS, CLIENTS, and JOBS Access databases.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
260
C h a p t e r - 11 D a t a b a s e M a i n t e n a n c e
Your new SQL databases should now contain all the information that was in the
Access databases.
Selecting the new TargetFax SQL Databases
At this stage in the conversion from Access to SQL, the data has been imported to
the new SQL databases. The final step in the conversion is to reset the controls
which determine which databases TargetFax uses, as follows:
1. In the tree view, expand the Databases icon and click the MAIN leaf.
The Main Databases pane displays the names of the Master DB, DNS DB, and
Clients DB databases that TargetFax uses.
2. Click the Master DB ellipsis to display the database to use. Notice that the
Access database is selected.
3. Click the SQL database, and then click OK.
4. Repeat this process to change the DNS DB and Clients DB to SQL databases.
5. If you are using the Broadcast Manager, you may want to repeat this process
for the Jobs database. To do so, click the Jobs leaf, in the tree view, and reset
Jobs DB to be an SQL database.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
261
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
6. When the System Administrator restarts, it will use the SQL databases. Exit
and Restart the System Administrator.
Your system is now configured to use the SQL databases. This will take effect
when you exit and restart the System Administrator.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
262
C h a p t e r - 11 D a t a b a s e M a i n t e n a n c e
Creating SQL Server DataSources for Imports and Lookups
This section explains how to import recipient records and other data for external
database lookups from SQL Servers. Because this feature functions independently
of the TargetFax internal databases, it is not necessary that you convert the TargetFax databases to SQL before you can use this feature. It is however essential that
you update your TargetFax installation to build 5.0.301, or higher, and restore the
default settings, as described in “Installing and Using the SQL Server Components” on page 255.
The next exercise imports the TargetFax Users table from the Master SQL database created in the last exercise. You can use this for practice, even if you have no
SQL data to import.
The previous example showed how to import recipients from the To... button, on
the Client. You can also import data from the System Administrator as follows:
1. In the tree view, click the Users icon.
2. In the right pane, click the Data Sources button.
3. In the toolbar, click the Add new TargetFax List or Datasource button.
4. Type the name of the Master file, including the.sql extension, and click the
Open button. The Add SQL DataSource Information is displayed. The Server
address displayed is the TargetFax SQL Server, set up in the System Administrator. The available databases are listed.
5. In the Database list box, click the Master database. Hint: The file name starts
with TF.
6. Click the higher of the two Use buttons, in the middle of this dialog box. The
Tables list box now displays one of the tables of this database.
7. Click the Tables list box, and select the Users table.
8. Click the lower Use button, to begin importing the table.
The first record of the table to import appears in the list box on the right. At this
point, you could use the Add Filter button to select the columns to import.
9. Click the Auto button to map all of the fields.
10. Change the Name of the new datasource, and click the Add button.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
263
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Create a Datasource from an External SQL Database
To create a DataSource from an external SQL database, the process is essentially
the same as described above. The sample procedure below provides an example of
how you could import from SQL; the names and locations of your files will he different.
1. Repeat the steps above to open the Add SQL DataSource Information.
2. Type a Name for the Datasource.
3. Click the Server ellipsis, to display the connection information.
4. Click the SQL Server list box.
5. From the displayed list of SQL server instances, make your selection.
6. Type the authentication information.
7. Select the table to import, and map the fields, as previously described.
Preconnection to a Specific Database
You might try to import a database to which the Database Administrator has not
provided you access.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
264
C h a p t e r - 11 D a t a b a s e M a i n t e n a n c e
TargetFax then displays the message below.
To correct this problem, check the Preconnect to a specific database only box,
type the name of the database you want, and click OK.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
265
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Deleting Sent and Received Faxes
The fastest way to remove sent or received faxes from the Fax Manager is to
search for and then delete the faxes that meet your specified date criteria, as follows:
1. Select the event type, such as Submitted, Received or All Events.
2. Select a user, or select System to delete all events of a given type.
3. Click the header of the Date/Time column.
4. Click the Find Record in Column tool bar icon to display the Find in Field dialog box. The Submitted (date) field is selected for searching.
5. This search finds all faxes sent or received before the start of the current year
by specifying “12/31/2007” as the Find What, and “Less than or Equal” as the
Where condition.
6. After you select your search criteria, click the Add-In Filter button. The
events list now displays only the requested events.
7. Click the Cancel button, and then the Select All and Delete Events tool bar
icons.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
266
Chapter - 12 TargetFax for RightFax
TargetFax for RightFax combines the power of TargetFax and Captaris
RightFax. It was developed, over the last five years, for our RightFax
customers who want to expand functionality in the areas of fax broadcast, mail merge, fax automation and archiving.
By combining TargetFax and RightFax, you can leverage the power of
the core TargetFax features (fax Broadcast Manager, Mail Merge, and
WorkFlow) with the numerous enterprise fax capabilities of RightFax.
RightFax enterprise fax capabilities include integration with MS
Exchange, Lotus Notes, Microsoft Active Directory, ERP, CRM and
Host.
Sending Faxes through RightFax
The TargetFax Server connects to the RightFax Server through the RightFax API. This allows networked users of the TargetFax Broadcast Manager or TargetFax Client Mail Merge modules to send faxes through
RightFax. The Broadcast Manager and Client each provide reports on the
status of sent faxes.
To RightFax, the TargetFax Server appears as another user. The rights of
this user are determined by the RightFax Administrator. RightFax reports
the status of faxes sent to its TargetFax user.
Extracting Faxes from RightFax
The TargetFax Server connection to the RightFax Server also extracts
faxes from the RightFax user database (single user or groups). Once
these faxes are extracted, they can be routed and manipulated with the
Targetfax WorkFlow fax automation and capture features.
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Installing TargetFax for RightFax
Before you can install TargetFax for RightFax, you must first install TargetFax, as
described in “Chapter - 4 Installing TargetFax Software to the Server,” and add the
WorkServer service as described in “The WorkServer Service” on page 85 of
“Chapter - 6 Add the WorkServer and Board Services.”
Add the TargetFax Connector for RightFax
Add the TargetFax connector for RightFax as follows:
1. In the System Administrator File menu, click Import New Component. This
displays the Import/Install which TargetFax Component? box.
2. Double-click the TargetFax Connector for RightFax line.
Install the FaxServer Service for RightFax
Install the FaxServer Service for RightFax as follows:
1. In the tree view, click FaxServer Services.
2. In the toolbar, click the
Install New FAX Service button to display the
Install New FAX Service box.
The Friendly ID is the name by which TargetFax identifies the FaxServer service.
3. Type a Friendly ID (optional).
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
268
C h a p t e r - 1 2 Ta r g e t F a x f o r R i g h t F a x
4. In the Server Type list box, select RightFax.
The Server Path is the Microsoft Windows Network ID computer name for this
server.
5. Click OK, to accept (System Account) as the logon account for the fax service.
6. In the Tools menu, click Start Service.
7. In the Server Path box of the Server Setup tab, type the computer name of the
RightFax server.
Server Path: The name of the RightFax server
Default User: The default RightFax User account
Send Chans: The number of licensed channels that TargetFax uses to send to
RightFax
Recv: The number of licensed channels that TargetFax uses to receive from RightFax
Both: The number of licensed channels TargetFax uses to both send to and receive
from RightFax
InUse and Max: Both display the total number of channels on the RightFax server
that are to be used by TargetFax
Normal Load: This displays the maximum number of events that can be processed from a Normal queue.
Max: This displays the maximum number of events that can be processed from a
Priority queue.
Load Sync Method: The means by which TargetFax determines the load on the
RightFax Server. The Status Queue method counts the TargetFax events that are
waiting to get Status. The Server Info method queries the RightFax Server for the
current load. The figure returned includes TargetFax and RightFax events.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
269
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Retries Errors: RightFax retries all errors the number of times its configuration
requires. When checked, TargetFax cancels failed events and resubmits events
that TargetFax recognizes as errors.
License Manager
Before you can start the RightFax FaxServer Service, you must enter a RightFax
enabled license key in the TargetFax License Manager. You can access the
License Manager by selecting the Licenses option, in the System Administrator
Tools menu.
The Module list box displays the modules available for license activation.
To obtain a license key by e-mail, complete the following procedure:
1. Click the TargetFax License Manager
zation code to the Clipboard.
Copy button. This moves the authori-
2. Open an e-mail message and address it to license@otgt.com.
3. Paste (Ctrl+v) the code into the e-mail message. Also include your name, company name and the name of your One Touch Sales Representative.
4. Send the message.
Enter your license keys as follows:
1. In the e-mail message you receive from One Touch Global Technologies, select
and copy the RightFax license key. If you have more than one license key,
select the code that begins with the letter “R.”
2. In the Module list box, select TargetFax Connector for RightFax.
3. Click the
Paste button.
4. Click Apply.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
270
C h a p t e r - 1 2 Ta r g e t F a x f o r R i g h t F a x
Start the RightFax FaxServer Service
To start the RightFax FaxServer Service, select it in the System Administrator tree
view, open the Tools menu and click Start Service.
Configure the TargetFax Client and Broadcast Manager for RightFax
The TargetFax Client and the Broadcast Manager must be set up to use the RightFax fax server and connect to RightFax as a RightFax user. The RightFax setup
procedure for these modules is as follows:
1. Start the Client or the Broadcast Manager Default Job Values. The Servers control appears on the main screen of either product.
2. Click the Servers ellipsis (...) in the Broadcast Manager, or the Svrs: ellipsis in
the Client.
3. Check the Show All Servers box. Then check the box next to the name of the
RightFax service.
4. Click OK.
5. Click the User ellipsis (...)
6. In the Users box, set the record type to Selected Servers.
7. Double-click a RightFax user.
8. Click OK.
9. The default User and Server settings are now changed for all broadcast jobs. If
you are resetting your Client default settings, return to the Client main screen,
and click Save Defaults.
Configure RightFax User Mailbox Polling
Before TargetFax can check the contents of RightFax user’s mailboxes for faxes
to import, you must select a user or group whose mail box(es) are polled. Edit the
RECV queue rule to specify the user’s mail boxes as follows:
1. In the System Administrator tree view, click the friendly name of the RightFax
Fax Server Service.
2. In the Queues/Schedule tab, double-click the RECV queue.
3. Click the Show Details button.
4. Click the Open Action ellipsis (...) to display the Edit Open Action/Rule.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
271
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
5. Make sure the Action/Rule is set to TestEvent(Use).
6. In the User list box, select a RightFax user or group, and click OK.
7. Click OK again, to save the change.
For a complete explanation of using TargetFax to direct inbound faxes, see “Chapter - 7 TargetFax for WorkFlow” on page 109.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
272
Chapter - 13 TargetFax for Cardiff TELEform
TargetFax for Cardiff TELEform is the only true fax automation solution designed specifically to integrate with Cardiff TELEform OCR
versions 6.x and above. TargetFax delivers faxes directly into Cardiff
TELEform for evaluation. Cardiff TELEform sends forms through
TargetFax as fax or e-mail messages. This section describes how to
install, configure and integrate TargetFax components with the
Cardiff TELEform OCR environment.
TargetFax for Cardiff TELEform requires the following TargetFax
components:
•
•
•
•
TargetFax Server
TargetFax WorkFlow Module
TargetFax Connector for TELEform
TargetFax Connect Agent for Cardiff TELEform Reader(s),
Design Workstation(s) and Verifier(s)
Prior to installing and configuring TargetFax for Cardiff TELEform,
the TargetFax Server software and TargetFax WorkFlow module must
be licensed and installed. The TELEform Connect Agent must also
have been selected during Client installation.
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Installation and Configuration
To minimize configuration time, the TargetFax Connector for TELEform is
installed as an optional component. It must be imported to the TargetFax System
Administrator tree view, and licensed in the TargetFax License Manager. Installation and configuration of TargetFax for Cardiff TELEform is a three step process:
1. Install the TargetFax Server (see “Chapter - 4 Installing TargetFax Software to
the Server” on page 41) on a computer with a network connection to the computer(s) running TeleFORM.
2. If the TELEform Reader(s), Design Workstation(s) or Verifier(s) are installed
on computers other than the TargetFax Server, install the TargetFax Client’s
TargetFax Connector for TELEform on these computers. See “” on page 125.
If you have installed the other Resources/Applications, you only need to install
the TeleFORM Connect Agent.
3. Import, license, and configure the TargetFax Connect Agent on these computers.
4. Set up the TELEform Auto Export Database.
Import the TargetFax TELEform Connector
1. To enable the TargetFax Connector for TELEform, click the Import New
Component option, in the System Administrator File menu.
:
2. Double-click TargetFax Connector for TELEform
The TELEform component appears in the Applications portion of the tree view,
and three queues are added to the Queues/Schedule tab.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
274
C h a p t e r - 1 3 Ta r g e t F a x f o r C a r d i f f T E L E f o r m
License the TargetFax Connector for TELEform
1. In the Tools menu, click Licenses… This displays the TargetFax License Manager.
The Module list box displays the modules available for license activation.
To obtain a license key by e-mail, complete the following procedure:
1. Click the TargetFax License Manager
zation code to the Clipboard.
Copy button. This moves the authori-
2. Open an e-mail message, and address it to license@otgt.com.
3. Paste (Ctrl+v) the code into the e-mail message. Also include your name, company name and the name of your One Touch Sales Representative.
4. Send the message.
Enter your license keys as follows:
1. In the e-mail message you receive from One Touch Global Technologies, select
and copy the TELEform (it starts with “T”) license key.
2. In the Module list box, select the TargetFax Connector for TELEform.
3. Click the
Paste button.
4. Click Apply.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
275
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Packaging
Queue Rules
There are three defined rules that control TargetFax for TELEform operation.
These rules are displayed on the Queues\Schedule tab on the right-hand pane of
the TargetFax System Administrator. This section describes the default settings
for these queues.
To display the Edit Queue Rule information, double-click a queue. Then click
Show Details.
The rule for the RECV queue controls delivery of incoming events to TELEform.
The SEND queue rule controls outgoing events from TELEform. The SEND rule
is an input rule that creates events in the OCR\SEND directory, and routes these to
the WorkFlow process defined in the Close Action box. The Close Action is preconfigured to deliver documents to the FAX:NORMAL send queue. Depending
on your environment or configuration requirements, the Close Action may also
have options to print or copy.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
276
C h a p t e r - 1 3 Ta r g e t F a x f o r C a r d i f f T E L E f o r m
The EXPORT queue rule defines how to export records generated by TELEform
evaluations. The Advanced Settings section defines an input rule that creates
events in the OCR\EXPORT directory, and routes these to the WorkFlow process
defined in the CloseAction. The default CloseAction is TELEFORM:OUTBOX.
The OUTBOX rule appears in the Custom/Routing Rules tab. The OUTBOX
rule controls what happens when the Packaging Option (See “Packaging Priority”
on page 279) is enabled. It preserves the information in the original package sent
to TELEform. By default, it acts as a starting point for customizing the handling
of TELEform Exports.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
277
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Set up the TELEform Auto Export Database
Once the TargetFax Connector for TELEform and the TargetFax Connect Agent
for Cardiff TELEform are installed, you can set up the Auto Exports for your
TELEform forms.
The steps below are similar to those found in the TELEform user manual Sample
v8 Customer Survey:
1. Open your form in the Cardiff TELEform Designer.
2. From the Form menu, click Auto Export Setup.
3. In the Auto Export Setup, click New. A second Auto Export Setup box
appears.
4. Choose TargetFax from the Format list, and click the Save as button. The
Connect Agent for TargetFax appears.
The Document/Package Routing section has three fields:
• The Export Rule field provides a list of TargetFax Export Rules. The
default rule is EXPORT.
• Optional RouteCode provides a routing code that can be used by the
Export Rule to route the export.
• Pkg Priority defines the relative priority of these fields in routing a package that contains this form.
The Supplementary Fields Mapping section has ten fields that specify the name
of a Routing Field, combinations of document fields and literal values to map to
it, and the priority of this routing field within a package (Pkg. Priority).
Note: It is not necessary to explicitly define file or directory names. These are
automatically created based on the Export Rule selected. This defaults to
EXPORT, as predefined in the TargetFax Connector for TELEform. Additional
export rules, added to the Connector, may also be selected.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
278
C h a p t e r - 1 3 Ta r g e t F a x f o r C a r d i f f T E L E f o r m
Packaging Priority
Cardiff TELEform uses the terms “form” and “document” interchangeably. We
refer to the collection of images as a “Package.” The Packaging Priority (Pkg Priority) defines the processing sequence of forms within TELEform. When a fax is
sent to TELEform for processing, each page is examined separately, and processed according to the Reader definition. Pages are evaluated in a sequence
determined by your environment, and the number of readers operating. A specific
Reader may interpret the first page of Form 1234, the second page of Form 1345,
a Non-Form.
Regardless of the number of readers used, Cardiff TELEform evaluates all pages
of a form before the form is added to the Verifier’s list of Forms for Review. By
the time each Form’s Auto-Export script is invoked, all the pages for that form
will have been evaluated and the data assembled.
TELEForm works with single faxes and is incapable of reassembling received
faxes into one fax.The TargetFax Packaging Priority option however can reassemble documents in the sequence in which they arrived. If the Packaging Priority
option is enabled, the TargetFax Connect Agent passes information to Cardiff
TELEform that identifies the original transaction file associated with the delivered
images. The TargetFax Export Script recovers and uses this key to rebuild the
original package, and route it in its entirety.
Thus, in cases where packages have multiple forms (each form having an
EXPORT Rule and/or RouteCode), in addition to saving OCR information about
each form, the TargetFax Export Scripts, and will also update the Package Export
Rule and RouteCode when the Packaging Priority for the current form is greater
than that of any previously saved form.
Note: Any positive value between 0 and 10 may be used to signify priority. These
values may be adjusted as you understand more about which forms are likely to
appear in specific packages. In our example, we assigned a value of 3, as a starting
point.
The TargetFax TELEform Export Script provides a scroll list of the fields in the
form selected for export. This information is part of the standard setup for an Auto
Export script.
To save the current configuration, click OK. Next click the Fields tab.
Fields Tab
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
279
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The Enabled column determines the exported fields. Field ID indicates the name
of the field in the form. The Database column provides the ability to map a field
ID to a column name in the database to which you export.
Note: The Auto Export Setup Script can neither concatenate fields, nor combine
First_Name Initial and Last_Name into one field. However, the TargetFax TELEform Script can perform this function.
Configuration Exercise
In the preceding procedure we selected the standard fields for EXPORT. The next
step in the TELEform Auto Export Process is to determine which fields we want
to use. For this example, we want to include individuals who completed the survey.
1. To select those records, check the first nine (First_Name through Phone)
fields.
2. Clear the four fields that begin with “q.” These only contain questionnaire data.
3. Clear the fields beginning with “Batch”. These are only for batch scanning.
4. Clear the rest of the fields that begin “q.”
5. The remaining fields have information about the incoming image, and must
remained selected. This is particularly important for the OrigPgSeq field,
which is required to reassemble a package in the correct order.
6. Click OK, to save your changes.
7. Select the new TELEform Export Rule and click Modify. When the second
dialog appears, click Save as. The Connect Agent for TargetFax appears.
The previous Document/Package Routing information has been preserved, but the
Document Fields box now reflects the changes we made on the AutoSetup
Fields tab.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
280
C h a p t e r - 1 3 Ta r g e t F a x f o r C a r d i f f T E L E f o r m
Set up additional TargetFax Routing Fields
1. Click NameSelect, in the first Routing Field box.
2. In the Document Fields list, verify that the First_Name field is selected, and
click the Map button. You’ll see that First_Name is transferred into the Document Fields or Literal Value box, with angle brackets.
3. In the Document Fields, click Initial list and then click Add. A space and
<Initial> are added to the Document Fields or Literal Value box.
4. In the Document Fields list box, select Last_Name and click Add. Your Connect Agent will appear as below.
5. Click OK to complete the TargetFax Connect Agent for TELEform.
You could continue mapping supplementary fields, such as Phone to FromPhone, and email to ToMail. Your Connect Agent would appear as below.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
281
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The last “>” appears to be missing. But it’s there. The Document Fields or Literal Values box is just a text box. You can edit it, or type values or literal text. The
Document Fields list the available fields. The Map and Add buttons provide a
way to add fields to the box.
This procedure defines an extra field that will be added to the saved Form data,
which can include information already saved in other fields (or literal text or other
things like date and time etc.). While this could be used to route to a database that
may need this information, it is also useful as part of the TargetFax routing process. This is where the Pkg Priority field come in. If this contains a non blank or
non zero value, and its Priority is greater than that of any equivalent fields so far
saved in that section, the Routing information is transferred to the Package section
of the transaction file.
Package transaction files
Each form that is evaluated has all its Data stored in its own section within the
file. The section is named for the form e.g. [65480]. If another instance of the
form is found in the package, it is named [65480-A], and so on. A common Package section (which is usually the original default section that was used to send the
event to TELEform) is then updated with Packaging information such as the number and list of Forms saved, the list of files in the package and any routing information for the package.
So to summarize, a Supplementary Field value is always added to the Form section of the file to complete the information about the form. The Supplementary
Field value is however only added to the Package Routing section if it has a higher
Pkg Priority than information already saved.
Mapping Additional Supplementary Fields
You could also map Phone to FromPhone, and email to ToMail. To arrange for
this export to be sent to the attention of an individual within our company, type literal text into the appropriate mapping field. Finally, just in case you ever want to
Archive this data, indicate which Database and Folder should be used. If you have
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
282
C h a p t e r - 1 3 Ta r g e t F a x f o r C a r d i f f T E L E f o r m
a special database for Surveys, you probably want to use that, but we’ll use our
Faxes database for now. Note that we leave the Pkg Priority of these fields blank
because they are not used for routing. At this point, the TargetFax Connect Agent
should look something like this:
When you have finished configuring these fields, click the OK button.Click OK
twice more to complete the TELEform Connect Agent for TargetFax setup.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
283
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Setting up Package Routing Priorities
In this section we look at some of the implications of the Package Routing Priorities.
Begin by creating a second Auto Export Script. Ideally we would select a
routable Cover Page. The sample Cover Page provided with TELEform is only a
draft and does not have suitable sample images that work, so let’s use another
form instead, and imagine that it might be used as a Cover Page.
Return to the TELEform Designer and open the Sample v8 Order Form. Then
follow the steps in the previous section to setup up an Auto Export Script. Limit
the fields exported to the Standard fields plus NAME, EvePhone, City, etc. Set
up the fields to look something like this:
This example uses the FormID for the RouteCode, but sets a Package Priority
of 2 (i.e. less than that for the previous form). The NAME in the form is mapped
to FromName, with a Package Priority of 4 (i.e. greater that used for FromName
in the previous form). The Sender’s Phone number is mapped to FromPhone (but
at a lower priority than that of the previous form), and appropriate Database and
Folder information. Press OK a few times to save the Export Script and then Save
the form.
Creating the TargetFax Sample Records
You will need some sample images and routing instructions to test these Export
scripts. This section explains how to create these.
1. Double-Click the TargetFax Tray Icon, to start the TargetFax Client.
2. Press the Browse… button, in the Attachments section, and browse to the
TELEform\Samples\Images folder:
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
284
C h a p t e r - 1 3 Ta r g e t F a x f o r C a r d i f f T E L E f o r m
3. Select order.tif and then click the Open button. The file is added to the
selected documents. Click the Save to Library button. The Save File As dialog box appears:
4. Change the name to TELEorder.tif, and click Save. The Add Document
Information dialog appears:
5. Update the information as shown above. and click Add. You have added the
Sample Order Form image to the TargetFax Library.
6. Repeat the above process to add the Sample Customer Survey image to the
Library.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
285
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Add a Test Recipient
Next we need to add a TELEform Test Recipient as follows:
1. Press the To… button to load the recipients list and then press the Add New
Recipient button, on the toolbar. The Add Recipient(s) dialog box appears:
2. Type the information as shown above.
3. Click the More button.
4. In the DID box, type the last four digits of the fax number this user will
receive.
5. Click Add and Close, to add this recipient.
Setup a User Account
Setup a user account for the inbound routing as follows:
1. Click the User ellipsis to display the User list.
2. Click the Add Individual(s) icon, in the toolbar. The Add User(s) dialog box
appears.
3. Click the More button.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
286
C h a p t e r - 1 3 Ta r g e t F a x f o r C a r d i f f T E L E f o r m
4. Fill in the information as above. The Name and Group fields are optional and
may be edited as desired.
Note: If your system does not support DID routing, you may be able to use Extension or Channel routing instead. In this case the DID box would contain the
extension defined in the TargetFax BoardServer or the appropriate channel number.
5. Click the In Routing ellipsis.
6. Check the User’s Custom X Actions box, and click OK.
7. Fill in the actions to look like this:
The first action assigns a default User account (which may be overwritten by
information in the TELEform scripts or Export rules). This ensures that when the
Export script returns this event to TargetFax, it does not forward it back to TELEform. Similarly, if the selected User has no specific Inbound routing rules, the
resetting of the Custom1 field is also needed to avoid this problem The final
action routes the event to the TELEFORM RECV Queue as discussed earlier.
8. Click OK to save the actions and your routing instructions should now look
like this:
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
287
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
9. Click the Add and Close buttons to add this new User.
Importing the TargetFax Sample Records
If you prefer not to enter all the sample records by hand, you can import the ones
shipped with the connector as follows:
1. In the System Administrator, click the MASTER database leaf. Then click the
Database Utilities command on the Tools menu.
2. Click the Import MASTER Database command, and browse to the TargetFax\Install\Addins\TELEFORM directory:
3. Double-click TELEFORM.edb, and then click the OK button to import the
sample records.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
288
C h a p t e r - 1 3 Ta r g e t F a x f o r C a r d i f f T E L E f o r m
Testing the Export and Package Routing
1. Before proceeding with the test, return to the System Administrator and
select the TELEform Application.
2. Click the Custom/Routing tab and double-click the TELEFORM:OUTBOX
rule. The Edit Custom/Routing Rule Information appears.
3. Click Show Details to display the default the Export Routing rules.
The first rule routes the Package to the Administrator if the RouteCode is 65480.
Otherwise, the currently identified User receives the packet. To see how this is
done, double-click the first Case/Condition. The Edit Custom Rule Condition dialog appears:
The Put(User=ADMINISTRATOR) action puts that value into the transaction
file, so that when the package is routed back to TargetFax it will be put in the
ADMINISTRATOR’s table. The default case routes it back without this special
assignment. In this scenario, because we have already assigned it to the
DEFAULT user prior to sending it to the TELEFORM:RECV rule, we can expect
it to be put in the DEFAULT table.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
289
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
To complete the test, we’ll send three faxes to the TELEform Test recipient.
We’ll use the wrap-back capability of the TestBoard Server to ensure that these are
routed to the TELEFORM:RECV rule and our TELEform Connect Agent Export
scripts should then do the rest.
1. Double-click the TargetFax Tray Icon to start the Client.
2. Click the To ellipsis to display the Recipients list; then click the TELEform
Test recipient.
3. Click the Library button, and the TELEform Sample Customer Survey
image.
4. Click the Send button.
5. Repeat the above steps to send the TELEform Sample Order Form image to
the TELEform Test recipient.
6. Finally, modify the above steps slightly to send both the TELEform Sample
Customer Survey and the TELEform Sample Order Form images to the
TELEform Test recipient.
You’ll now need to put on your TELEform user hat. Unless you’ve modified the
default setup for these forms, they’re going to require Verification. If its not running, start the TELEform Verifier. Monitor the images that come in for the Sample v8 Customer Survey and Sample v8 Order Form forms and select any new
images. Since you don’t really care about the actual values, you can immediately
Save them for Export. This will initiate the Export scripts.
When all the pages have been saved, you’ll be ready to see what happened to the
three faxes.
1. Right-click the TargetFax Tray icon to display the context menu.
2. Click the Fax Manager command.
3. Select the DEFAULT User.
4. Click the Preview toolbar icon, and adjust the image to see the Phone column
and the top of the image. You should see something like this:
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
290
C h a p t e r - 1 3 Ta r g e t F a x f o r C a r d i f f T E L E f o r m
This is the second Fax we sent, the single page sample Order Form.
5. Select the ADMINISTRATOR User and you should see the following:
The most recent fax is the third one we sent; the 2-page Customer Satisfaction
Survey and Sample Order Form. If you arrow down, you’ll find the next one is the
first fax we sent; the single page Customer Satisfaction Survey.
These images neatly demonstrate the power of TargetFax’s Package Routing.
When the Sample Customer Survey was received, it set a RouteCode of 65480
which caused it to be routed to the ADMINISTRATOR, with the sender’s Name
and Phone number read off the form.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
291
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
When the Sample Order Form was received, it set a RouteCode of 65478, so the
default case condition caused it to be routed to the DEFAULT user, along with the
Sender’s Name and Phone number captured off the form.
When the two forms were received together however, the relative priorities of the
main Route Priority set the RouteCode to 65480, which caused it to be routed to
the ADMINISTRATOR. But the higher route priority of the Order Form’s FromName mapping caused the evaluated value of Order Form’s NAME field to be the
one saved with the package.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
292
Chapter - 14 Upgrading TargetFax
This chapter explains how to do build and version TargetFax
upgrades, and how to uninstall TargetFax.
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Upgrading TargetFax
The are two ways to upgrade TargetFax: upgrade the version, or upgrade the
build. Moving from version 4 to 4.5 is a version upgrade. If you upgrade from an
earlier to a later release of the same version number, this is a build upgrade.
If you are upgrading your build, see “Upgrading the TargetFax Server and Client”
on page 303. To upgrade your version, unistall TargetFax, as described below, and
then install the new TargetFax version. See “Chapter - 4 Installing TargetFax Software to the Server” on page 41.
Uninstalling the TargetFax Server Software, Broadcast Manager,
Print Driver and Client
Overview
TargetFax components are often installed on multiple computers. While the TargetFax Server is installed on a single computer, the TargetFax Client is installed
on the server and on any domain member with a network connection to the TargetFax Server. These instructions explain how to remove all TargetFax software from
the Server. If you are uninstalling the Client from a workstation, please proceed to
“Uninstall the TargetFax Client” on page 298.
Each of these installations creates a log of the installed and replaced modules, in
the Install\Backup directory.
Because of the dependency of Client workstations on the TargetFax Server, and
the fact that it can be installed from a workstation, there is no Add/Remove Program for uninstalling the TargetFax Server.
Uninstalling TargetFax consists of the following procedures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Back up databases and image files
Stop the System Administrator Services
Remove Fax Board and FaxServer Services
Remove the WorkServer and MailServer Services
Uninstall the TargetFax Fax Printer
Unistall the TargetFax Client
Remove the TargetFax system files
Delete the TargetFax directories
Back Up Databases and Image Files
By default, the TargetFax Server installs to subdirectories of C:\TargetFax. The
contents of these subdirectories is described below. We recommend that you back
up each directory to a separate directory.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
294
C h a p t e r - 1 4 U p g r a d i n g Ta r g e t F a x
The SYSTEM directory contains the MASTER.MDB, CLIENTS.MDB and
DNS.MDB Databases. The DNS database contains your DONOTSEND List.
The MASTER database contains information about TargetFax USERS,
LIBRARY documents, COVERPAGES, FORMS, TOPICS, HEADERS, FOOTERS, etc. The CLIENTS database contains event histories of the faxes submitted
by each user’s TargetFax Client when Job Tracking was not enabled. You may
wish to archive these three databases before deleting the TargetFax Directory.
The JOBS directory contains any JOBS.MDB Databases. Each database has a
separate subdirectory, with the same name as the database. These contain a series
of subdirectories, each of which matches the name of a job in the database. These
typically contain files that record the details of each transaction, together with any
images associated with the job. Once the job is completed, these directories are
usually expendable. When a job is deleted, these directories are deleted as well.
The only files which are probably significant are the databases in the \SYSTEM
directory. You may wish to archive these before you delete the TargetFax Directory.
The LIBRARY directory contains images and other files used in your jobs and
Submit transmissions, together with the CoverPages, Overlay Forms, and Signature files you created.You may wish to keep some or all of these.
The DATA directory is used to store common data sources. You may want to keep
these.
The USERS directory contains subdirectories for each TargetFax Client user and
received events. These store the detail and image files for individual transmissions. Although summary records are maintained in the Client database, this is
often the only location for the actual images. You may want to save these subdirectories.
The ARCHIVE directory stores images and control files after they are processed
by other modules. These will usually be in a series of subdirectories organized by
day, in the Images subdirectory. If you have the Archive Module, there may be
image databases stored in the ARCHIVE folder in addition to, or sometimes in
place of, the image and control files.
The SERVERS directory contains the Queues supporting the FAX and other Services. These are typically not saved.
Export DoNotSend List
In the Broadcast Manager tree view, click the DoNotSend List folder.
Click the Select All, followed by the followed by the Export button.
Browse to the destination directory, and save the file.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
295
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Stop All Services
All TargetFax Server installations include at least one WorkServer and one FaxServer Service. Your system may also include a MailServer Service. Stop all of
these services as follows:
Note: You must uninstall the TargetFax Server software before you uninstall the
TargetFax Client.
1. In the System Administrator tree view, expand the WorkServer Services
branch.
2. Click the WorkServer Service (Typically “Work1”), and the Stop Service icon,
in the toolbar.
3. Expand the FaxServer Services branch.
4. Click a Board Service, (Typically “Fax1”), and the Stop Service icon, in the
toolbar.
5. Stop any remaining Fax Services or Board Services.
6. If applicable, stop the MailServer Service.
Remove the TargetFax Tray Icon
Right-click the TargetFax tray icon, and click the Exit command.
Remove the Fax Boards and Fax Board Services
1. In the tree view, click a Board Service (typically Fax1).
2. Click the Board/Channel SetUp tab, to display the fax board.
3. Click the fax board.
4. Click the Remove Board button.
5. In the System Administrator toolbar, click the Save Server/Board/Channel Info
button.
6. In the System Administrator toolbar, click the Remove Service icon.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for any remaining e.g. FAX2, Board Services.
Remove WorkServer and MailServer Services
1. In the tree view, click the Work Server Service (typically Work1) leaf of
WorkServer Services.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
296
C h a p t e r - 1 4 U p g r a d i n g Ta r g e t F a x
2. In the System Administrator toolbar, click the Remove Service icon.
3. Click OK, to confirm removal.
4. If the MailServer Service is installed, click the MailServer Service (typically
MAIL1) leaf of MailServer Services.
5. Click the Remove Service icon.
6. Click OK, to confirm removal.
Uninstall the TargetFax Fax Printer
1. At the TargetFax Server, click the Run option, in the Windows Start menu.
2. Browse to C:\targetfax\Install\PRINTDRV.EXE, and click OK.
3. Click Next.
4. Click Custom.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
297
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
5. Clear the Install TargetFax Print Driver check box.
6. Check Remove existing Driver(s) (prior to installation).
7. Click Next.
8. Click Install.
9. Click Finish.
Uninstall the TargetFax Client
Follow this procedure to unistall the TargetFax Client on the Server or on a workstation.
1. If the TargetFax icon is in the system tray, right-click it. Then click the Exit
command.
2. Open the Windows Control Panel.
3. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Click TargetFax Client
5. Click Change/Remove.
6. Click Automatic, then Next.
7. Click Next.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
298
C h a p t e r - 1 4 U p g r a d i n g Ta r g e t F a x
8. Click Finish.
As the uninstall program is removing the TargetFax files, you may be prompted to
confirm removal of the shared system components no longer in use. If the system
did not have Crystal Reports installed prior to the TargetFax Client installation,
these are the Crystal Report files used by the TargetFax Client.
9. Click YES TO ALL.
10. Close the Add/Remove Programs Control Panel.
11. Open the Add/Remove Programs Control Panel.
The TargetFax Client may still be visible. This indicates that at least one of the
modules was installed more than once.
12. Repeat the TargetFax Client uninstall procedure until the TargetFax Client no
longer appears in Add/Remove Programs.
Uninstall the TargetFax Server
Starting with TargetFax build 5.0.306, the TargetFax Server software also appears
in Add/Remove Programs. If your are uninstalling an earlier version, proceed to
“Remove the TargetFax Client System Files” on page 300. If you see a program
named TargetFax, remove it as follows:
1. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
2. Click TargetFax
3. Click Change/Remove, to select your uninstall method.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
299
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
4. Click Next.
5. Select your roll back option, and click Next.
6. Click Next.
7. Click the Finish button.
Remove the TargetFax Client System Files
As some of these files may be in use, you need to reboot before you can delete
them.
Delete OTIS.INI and OTSARC.INI from the WINNT or Windows Directory.
Depending on your installation, all of the following files may be installed to the
WINNT(or Windows)\SYSTEM32 Directory. Delete as many as you can find.
•
•
•
•
OTSARC.DLL
OTSDB.DLL
OTSFAX.DLL
OTSVWR.DLL
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
TargetFax Archive Module
TargetFax Database Update Module
Fax DLL
TargetFax Viewer Module
300
C h a p t e r - 1 4 U p g r a d i n g Ta r g e t F a x
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OTSRF.DLL
OTSRFCOM.DLL
OTSTEST.DLL
OTSUTIL.DLL
TFSUBMIT.EXE
OTSDCL.DLL
OTSUSER.DLL
OTSSVC.CPL
TargetFax RightFax API Module
TargetFax RightFax COMAPI Module
TargetFax TestFax DLL
TargetFax Utility DLL
TargetFax Submit Dialog Invoker
Note: OTSSVC.CPL cannot be removed until your PC is rebooted. Once your PC
is rebooted, go immediately to the WINNT\SYSTEM32 directory and delete this
file. Other DLL files such as OTSTEST.DLL may not appear on your system.
Remove the TargetFax Directories
A default installation places all Client files in C:\OTLocal, and all server files in
C:\TargetFax. After you have performed the necessary back ups, erase these directories.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
301
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Uninstalling Netaccess Drivers
To remove the Netaccess Drivers:
1. Open the Windows Control Panel and click Add/Remove Programs.
2. Select Brooktrout ESCC v1.75, and click Change/Remove.
3. Click Yes.
Uninstall shield will remove the ECC175 files from the system.
Install the Targetfax Server
Install the new TargetFax version as described in Chapter - 4 Installing TargetFax
Software on the Server.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
302
C h a p t e r - 1 4 U p g r a d i n g Ta r g e t F a x
Upgrading the TargetFax Server and Client
This section explains how to upgrade your TargetFax build on systems where the
WorkServer rules have not been customized. If you have a WorkFlow license, and
have customized your WorkServer rules, please contact TargetFax Technical Support before continuing with the upgrade.
The steps required to upgrade your TargetFax build are as follows:
• Prepare the system for upgrade
• Run the TargetFax Service pack installation software
• Import Default WorkServer Service rules and configuration files
This section provides detailed procedures for these tasks.
Prepare the System for Upgrade
Backup the Configuration Files
Make a copy of the.ini files in the C:\TargetFax\Logs directory and copy
the contents of C:\TargetFax\System.
Stop All Services
All TargetFax Server installations include at least one WorkServer and one FaxServer Service. Your system may also include a MailServer Service. Stop all of
these services as follows:
1. In the System Administrator tree view, expand the WorkServer Services
branch.
2. Click the WorkServer Service (typically “Work1”), and the Stop Service icon,
in the toolbar.
3. Expand the FaxServer Services branch.
4. Click a Board Service, (typically “Fax1”), and the Stop Service icon, in the
toolbar.
5. Stop any remaining Fax Services or Board Services.
6. If applicable, stop the MailServer Service.
Remove the TargetFax Tray Icon
Right-click the TargetFax tray icon, and click the Exit command.
Upgrade the Server
The Server and Client modules upgrade installation programs display the same
series of screens described in “Chapter - 4 Installing TargetFax Software to the
Server” on page 41.
To upgrade the server:
1. Double-click the Setup file and proceed as previously described. The screens
that appear differently in an upgrade are described below.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
303
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
The server install program detects the location of the TargetFax files. This will
usually be C:\Targetfax.
It prompts you to back up your files up to a sub-folder of the same directory. This
will usually be C:\Targetfax\backup.
.
After all files are copied to the C:\TargetFax and C:\OTLocal directories, the edit
information for the Client displays.
2. Make sure the modules you purchased are checked.
3. If Fax Printer Driver is checked, clear the check box, and click OK.
4. When prompted, click Finish.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
304
C h a p t e r - 1 4 U p g r a d i n g Ta r g e t F a x
Upgrade the Client on a WorkStation
The server upgrade installer program replaces the Client.exe, located in the /install
directory of the folder where you installed the TargetFax Server files, with the
new version.
To upgrade the modules on a workstation:
1. Stop all Windows programs.
2. Right-click the TargetFax tray icon and then click the Exit command.
3. Browse to and double-click the Client.exe file.
4. Click Next, to install the Modules.
5. Click Next, to select the OTLocal directory.
6. Click Install.
7. Check the boxes for the Resources/Applications that you purchased.
8. Clear the check from Fax Printer Driver.
9. Click Finish.
Upgrade the WorkServer Service Rules and Configuration
The upgrade installation program does not overwrite the rules of the build you are
upgrading. This precaution preserves any customized WorkServer Service rules
you may be using. Consequently, new features related to the WorkServer Service
rule will not be visible. If you do not have any customized WorkServer Service
rules, follow the procedure below to import the rules for your new build.
1. In the System Administrator tree view, click WorkServer Services.
2. In the Tools menu, click Restore Default Settings.
3. Click Yes to continue.
4. Click Yes, to import fields and values from OTSITE.ini.
5. Click Yes, to import rules from OTSITE.ini.
6. In the tree view, click the Users icon
7. In the Tools menu, click Restore Default Settings. Follow the same steps you
used to restore WorkServer Services.
8. Expand the Databases icon.
9. Restore the default settings for Databases, Main and Jobs.
Reinstall Services
After you complete the instructions on the server upgrade installation screens,
reinstall the services as follows.
1. Start the TargetFax System Administrator.
2. Click the name of a work service or board service.
3. Click the Tools menu.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
305
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
4. Click Reinstall Service. If you are prompted to confirm, click OK.
5. You are prompted to type your Password and Confirm password. Type the
password for the log on account for this service, in each of these boxes, and
click OK.
.
6. Select each stopped service, and the click the Start Service toolbar icon
7. Repeat steps two through six for each of your services.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
306
C h a p t e r - 1 4 U p g r a d i n g Ta r g e t F a x
Uninstall the TargetFax Client
Follow this procedure to unistall the TargetFax Client on the Server or on a workstation.
1. If the TargetFax icon is in the system tray, right-click it. Then click the Exit
command.
2. Open the Windows Control Panel.
3. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Click TargetFax Client
5. Click Change/Remove.
6. Click Automatic, then Next.
7. Click Next.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
307
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
8. Click Finish.
As the uninstall program is removing the TargetFax files, you may be prompted to
confirm removal of the shared system components no longer in use. If the system
did not have Crystal Reports installed prior to the TargetFax Client installation,
these are the Crystal Report files used by the TargetFax Client.
9. Click YES TO ALL.
10. Close the Add/Remove Programs Control Panel.
11. Open the Add/Remove Programs Control Panel.
The TargetFax Client may still be visible. This indicates that at least one of the
modules was installed more than once.
12. Repeat the TargetFax Client uninstall procedure until the TargetFax Client no
longer appears in Add/Remove Programs.
Remove the TargetFax Client System Files
As some of these files may be in use, you may need to reboot before you can
delete them.
Delete OTIS.INI and OTSARC.INI from the WINNT or Windows Directory.
Depending on your installation, all of the following files may be installed to the
WINNT(or Windows)\SYSTEM32 Directory. Delete as many as you can find.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OTSARC.DLL
OTSDB.DLL
OTSFAX.DLL
OTSVWR.DLL
OTSRF.DLL
OTSRFCOM.DLL
OTSTEST.DLL
OTSUTIL.DLL
TFSUBMIT.EXE
OTSDCL.DLL
OTSUSER.DLL
OTSSVC.CPL
TargetFax Archive Module
TargetFax Database Update Module
Fax DLL
TargetFax Viewer Module
TargetFax RightFax API Module
TargetFax RightFax COMAPI Module
TargetFax TestFax DLL
TargetFax Utility DLL
TargetFax Submit Dialog Invoker
Note: OTSSVC.CPL cannot be removed until your PC is rebooted. Once your PC
is rebooted, go immediately to the WINNT\SYSTEM32 directory and delete this
file. Other DLL files such as OTSTEST.DLL may not appear on your system.
Remove the TargetFax Directories
A default installation places all Client files in C:\OTLocal. Erase this directory.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
308
Chapter - 15 TargetFax Billing Module
Using the Billing module, you can track the costs, or amounts to bill for services.
The Broadcast Manager Billing Rates feature tracks the costs of faxes sent in
broadcast jobs. The billing rates feature for Workflow calculates costs for faxes,
e-mail or files sent or received by the users you associate with these events. Billing reports summarize the costs charged to each user or job.
This chapter explains how to set rates and bill costs for the following processes:
• Fax Broadcasts
• FTP uploads/download
• TargetFax FTP Gateway Services
O n e To u c h G l o b a l Te c h n o l o g i e s , I n c .
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Licensing the TargetFax Billing Module
If you purchased this module when you first bought TargetFax, it was included in
your System Administrator license. You would have licensed it when you applied
the license key for the System Administrator. If you purchased it subsequently,
you’ll need to apply a new System Administrator license key to enable this feature.
See “Chapter - 2 TargetFax System Administration” on page 23 for instruction in
using the TargetFax License Manager.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
310
C h a p t e r - 1 5 Ta r g e t F a x B i l l i n g M o d u l e
Costing Broadcast Manager Jobs
You can set billing rates for selected jobs. If you use standard rates, it might be
more convenient to set default billing rates.
To set billing rates for a job, follow these steps:
1. Start the Broadcast Manager and create a new job, or open a job that is in pending.
2. Click the Billing Rates button to display Edit Billing Rates. If the job has no
preexisting or default values, your screen appears as show below.
\
TargetFax provides the following measures of the transmission volume of a job:
•
•
•
•
per Minute: the duration of transmission in minutes
per Page: the number of pages sent or failed
per File: the number of files sent or failed
per Fax: The number of fax transmissions, sent or failed
Note: You must set the billing rates before you submit the job. Changes made to
the billing rates after the job runs have no affect on the billing report.
As a example, we set the Sent OK Faxes rate to fifty cents for each fax sent, and
twenty cents for each fax that fails. We submitted the broadcast.
After the broadcast completed, we clicked the Broadcast Manager Print Reports
button, in the toolbar, and clicked the Preview button, to display the Recipients by
Status report.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
311
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
This report, and other reports in the Job Recipients Report Group, display the
duration and cost for each transmission, and totals for the selected job.
The Amount column shows 0.50 for each fax sent. Held faxes are not billed. Had
any of our faxes failed, these would have been billed at 0.20 per fax.
Broadcast Manager Billing Defaults
If most of your jobs are billed at the same costs, you could set your billing defaults
as follows:
1. In the Broadcast Manager tree view, double-click the Default Job Values
folder.
2. Click the Billing Rates button.
3. Set your billing rates, and click OK.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
312
C h a p t e r - 1 5 Ta r g e t F a x B i l l i n g M o d u l e
Costing Workflow Events
You can also use the billing module to track the cost of sent and received events.
When TargetFax sends or receives information through fax, e-mail or FTP, this
constitutes an event. This section explains how to select the events that will be
tracked for costing. It then shows how these events are linked to the User Profile
of the user charged with these costs.
Edit Billing Rates
The Billing Rates dialog box displays the billable events. View this box as follows:
1. Start the System Administrator.
2. In the tree view, click the Users icon.
3. Click the Default Receiver ellipsis.
4. Click the Edit Entry toolbar icon, to view the User Profile.
5. Click More, and then the Billing Rates button. This displays the costs for
events associated with the default receiver.
In addition to the billing units offered in the Broadcast Manager, such as per
Minute, workflow billing provides the option of billing on a per Event basis. This
counts all the files transferred in one send or receive event as one unit.
Sent Files
Files uploaded by a TargetFax FTP Upload Service are sent events.
If an application copies a file into a directory and TargetFax sends the file, as fax
or e-mail, this is billed as a sent fax or e-mail.
Received Files
“Received” refers to files that are copied from a directory and processed. These
could be scanned into the directory from a scanner, or deposited there by an FTP
service.
Inbound faxes are billed as “received” events by the user whose User Profile
routes the fax.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
313
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Billing Mode Considerations
Billing Sent Ok Faxes by the minute reflects the cost of sending the fax. Billing
failed faxes by the minute may be hard to justify to a broadcast customer. It may
make more sense to charge a small flat rate per failed event. Billing by the File or
by the Page is a most sensible way to charge for FTP transmissions.
Printing Billing Reports
Broadcast Job Billing Reports
These reports use the billing rates set in a Broadcast Manager job.
If you have a Broadcast Manager job open when you click the Print Reports toolbar icon, the default report to print is the Job Recipients by Status report. This
and other job recipient reports are suitable for billing reports.
The only filter is the Table list box, where you select the job on which you report.
User Information Billing Reports
These reports use the billing rates set in the User Profile of the user associated
with sent and/or received events.
You can access billing reports from any screen that displays the Print Reports
toolbar icon. Then you select Billing by Date/Time, as the Report Name. The
following options and filters become available:
Table: From this list you can select the user whose events are billed.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
314
C h a p t e r - 1 5 Ta r g e t F a x B i l l i n g M o d u l e
Status: Status of events to bill.
The Period and Event filters (shown below) work together with the status selector
to define a period during which billable events with the same status occurred. All
three criteria must be satisfied before an event will appear on a billing report.
Transmitted: Faxes that have been sent
Date Imported: The date the recipient information in the fax was imported into
TargetFax
Submitted: When the fax was submitted for transmission. The fax could also be
in a queue, or held for later transmission.
Last Updated: This is the date when the status of the sent or received event was
most recently written to the TargetFax database.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
315
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Using the Billing Module with a TargetFax FTP Upload and Download Service
Sample Exercise
This section explains how to configure an FTP Upload/Download Service to use
the Billing Module. If you are not familiar with creating TargetFax FTP sites, see
“Chapter - 8 TargetFax FTP Connector” on page 181.
Note: For an Upload/Download service, only the MAIN, UPLOAD and
DNLOAD FTP Server rules should be enabled.
Begin by selecting the user account that will control cost tracking as follows:
1. In the System Administrator tree view, click an FTP upload service.
The User box specifies the user account used to track Uploads and Downloads
when Tracking and Billing options are enabled.
2. Click the User ellipsis.
3. Click the Add Individuals button, in the toolbar.
4. Fill in the User Profile. For purposes of this tutorial, we created a user called
SILOCOMP.
5. Click More, and then the Billing Rates button. Set the billing rates for Sent
Files (FTP Upload) or Received Files (FTP Download). Then click OK.
6. Click Add and then Close. Click OK to close the User list.
7. In the File menu, click the Save Server Info command.
8. Click the RestartSevice button, in the toolbar.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
316
C h a p t e r - 1 5 Ta r g e t F a x B i l l i n g M o d u l e
Modify the Upload rule to enable the tracking and billing options as follows:
1. in the Queues/Schedule tab, double-click the UPLOAD rule, and then the
Show Details button. It should look like this:
After uploading each batch of files, the DeleteDCF Close Action ends this event,
by erasing the control file. A record of the event is recorded in the Service’s log
file. To keep track of Upload events for billing purposes, we need to route the
event back into the standard inbound Workflow process.
2. Click the Close Action ellipsis.
3. Change the Action/Rule to Route To(Rule), Class/Group to WORK, and the
Queue/Rule to RECV, and click OK.
4. Click the RestartSevice button, in the toolbar.
If you are downloading files, you will need to make a similar change to the
DNLOAD rule.
View the Billing Report
To view the billing report:
1. Click the User ellipsis, in the Server Setup tab of the FTP Service.
2. Click the Print Reports toolbar icon.
3. For the Report Name, select Billings by Date and Time.
4. Click the Print or Preview button.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
317
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
Using the Billing Module with a TargetFax FTP Gateway Service
This section explains how to configure a TargetFax FTP Gateway service to use
the Billing Module. In the System Administrator tree view, click an FTP GatewayService. Our sample rule, as indicated by the Resource box, is called OTGT.
By default, TargetFax does not keep copies of events that Fax and Mail Servers
send on behalf of remote clients. This saves disk space. Once event results are
returned to the originating site, all information about these events is deleted from
the local site. However, the REPLY rule can be modified to allow tracking and
billing of remote resources by local sites.
Set up billing for an FTP Gateway service as follows:
1. Double-click the REPLY rule, and click the Show Details button. This should
display as shown:
The CloseAction is DeleteAll. This causes local events and images to be
removed.
2. Click the CloseAction ellipsis, and change this action to appear as shown
below:
After you change the Action/Rule to Route to(Rule), you can change the
Class/Group to Work, and the Queue/Rule to Update.
3. Click OK twice, to save this change. This causes remotely submitted events to
be saved as local events that can be tracked and billed.
4. Disable the UPLOAD and DNLOAD rules. Enable all other FTP rules.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
318
C h a p t e r - 1 5 Ta r g e t F a x B i l l i n g M o d u l e
Bill to a User Account
To track the costs of FTP Gateway transmissions, you need to create a special purpose user for each remote site that access your resources through the gateway. The
user name must be the same as the remote site to which the gateway connects.
The User Profile dialogue box is where you specify the Billing Rates for events on
the TargetFax site.
Set Up a Billing Scenario
This section explains how events billed at differing rates are combined into a
user’s billing report.
One way to isolate the billable activities involved in servicing one customer is to
associate faxes received from that customer to selected DID numbers. In this sample configuration, all faxes received from and billed to one customer are received
on two DID numbers. Faxes received on these DID fax lines are routed to the
directory associated with the Copy to Digitech settings of the special purpose
SILOCOMP user.
The SILO FTP Service then uploads the deposited files to our ImageSilo account.
We will capture all billable events for our SILOCOMP user by metering the faxes
received from one customer.
We then display a billing report for activity of the SILOCOMP user.
Set Up the Inbound Routing Actions
1. Start the TargetFax System Administrator, click the Users icon, and then the
User Profiles button.
2. Click the Add Individuals button. This exercise creates a user named SILOCOMP.
3. In the DID box, type a comma separated list of the DID numbers on which you
will receive faxes.
4. Click the In Routing ellipsis.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
319
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
5. Check the Copy to Digitech, and Forward to Users FaxTo: boxes.
6. Click OK, to return to the User Profile.
7. Click the Billing Rates button. Set the billing rates for Received Faxes, and
click OK.
We also need to specify the Job and File name indexing information for the Copy
to Digitech.
8. If the indexing structure were Company_DID_Date_Time_Name, we would
set this up by typing HR\<DID>_$m-$d-$Y_$h$M in the Directory field.
Tests the TargetFax Billing Scenario
To test the billing scenario, we’ll send a fax to the DID of the Silicomp user, and
display a billing report as follows:
1. Look in the System Administrator tree view to be sure that the WORK1,
TESTBRD (FaxServer Service), and FTP Gateway Services are configured
properly and running.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
320
C h a p t e r - 1 5 Ta r g e t F a x B i l l i n g M o d u l e
2. Start the Client.
3. Send a fax to a fax number that includes a DID number for the Silocomp user.
4. Select two sample documents from the library, say DEMOMRG and DEMO.
Your Attachments list should now look like this:
5. Click Send.
6. Send another fax to this or another DID number for this user.
7. Right-click the TargetFax tray icon, and click the Fax Manager command.
8. Switch to the SILOCOMP user. If you don’t see the faxes you just sent the
Silocomp user, click the Update Status button, in the toolbar.
9. After the fax is received, click the Print Reports toolbar icon.
10. Click the Preview button to see a billing report for the faxes received for
sending to Image Silo.
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
321
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
322
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
A
Add Individuals 31
Add the
Board Service
Brooktrout 1034 T1 87
Brooktrout TR1034 E1 92, 96
Brooktrout TR114 P4l 92, 96
Brooktrout TR114 T1 104, 113
Eicon Boards 113
TruFax 100/200 84
Connector for RightFAX 268
Add/Edit/Delete Bill Code and Dial Plans
35
Add/Edit/Delete Doc Splits and Indexes 35
Add/Edit/Delete Library Documents 35
Add/Edit/Delete Recipients 34
Additional Boards, Installing 57
Administrator 34
Alerts
Barcode 43
Sent when no Bar Code is Detected 235
WorkServer 42
Archive/Delete Logs 45
Associate 34
Auto Deskew Image 247
Auto Rotate Image 247
Automatic Fax Removal
Configuring AFR 118
Routing to 120
B
BarCode
Character Substitution 202
Create a Form 231
Fonts Installation and Setup 201
Separate Documents at 177
Symbologies 204
Barcode
separator cover page 231
BarCode Component 241
Importing 200, 242
BarCode Profile Fields 228
BarCode Value Profiles 217
BarCode/Image Processing/Splitting option 177
Barcode/ImagingProcessing Splitting 148
Billing Module
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
Costing Broadcasts 311
Costing Workflow Events 313
Printing Billing Reports 314
Billing Reports for
FTP Upload and Download Service 316
Workflow Events 313
Blank Page, Separate Documents at 177
BodySfx 215
Broadcast Manager
Billing Reports 309
RightFAX Configuration 271
Brooktrout Fax Board Preparation 51
ISA Boards 54
NetAccess Cards 54
TR114 (PCI) Digital T1 51
Brooktrout Fax Boards 48
Brooktrout Fax Boards Supported 48
Brooktrout TR1034 E1, Configuring the
92, 96
BrookTrout TR114 TI, Configuring the 104
Brooktrout TruFax 100/200, Configuring
the 84
C
Channel Routing 155
Channel Service Unit 56
Check Status Files 45
Clear Image Run Time
Install the 201
Code 39 Bar Code Font 202
Completion Actions 178
Copy To option 142
Costing Broadcast Manager Jobs 311
Cover Page, Default 42
CoverPage option 207
Custom Routing to a Directory 140
Custom Send Topic
178
Custom/Routing Rules, Working with 238
D
Data Sources 41
Database Maintenance 250
Decode 212
Default
Copy To directories 44
Inbound Routing 136
Default Document Profile 205
323
Default Receiver 136
Change the 136
Default Reveiover, Setting 30
Default Sender 33
DFC Files 163
DID
Analog 59
Digit Length 60
Ordering DID Telephone Service 59
DID Routing 153
Digitech
Copy Received Faxes to 149
Diva Server Software 66
Document Profile
Attach to User Information 209
attached to User Information 209
Custom 226
Default 205
Options 207, 211, 230
Options, MissingCode 207
Symbology 214
Document Profile Options
BodySfx 215
Cover Page 214
CoverSfx 215
Lookup 213
TypeSfx 215
Document Profile, Create a new 228
Document/Package Routing, for Teleform
278
Dropped Files, Faxing 162
Dropped Files, faxing 162
DTMF Routing 155
E
Edit Security 34
Eicon Boards
Configuring the 113
Global Channel Settings 115
E-mail Address, Inbound Routing to 145,
147
E-mail, Receiving Faxes as 145
Events are Private to User Supervisor 35
Every N Pages, Separate Documents 177
F
Faxing Dropped Files 162
Faxing Files Saved to a Directory 162
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
FaxServer, Setup Multiple 45
File and Directory Naming Parameter 144
File and Directory Naming Parameters 144
FileBase 215
Files Saved to a Directory, Routing 166
Forwarding Faxes Via FTP 188
FTP Connector 182
Ftp Gateway Service 318
FTP uploads/download Billing Reports 309
FtpServer
Gateway Service 188
Upload Service 183
G
General 34
Group Access to Faxes 36
H
Hide the Events of a User 36
Hold Remaining Actions 148
I
Image Modification
Auto Rotate Image 247
Convert Standard Fax to Fine 247
Remove Background Halftone 247
Remove Punch Holes 247
Image PRO Component 241
Image Processing Options 246
Image Processing
in Document Profile 244
Options 247
Immediate-Start 60
Inbound Routing
Default Settings 44
Saving to Custom Paths 141
Include Attachment
178
Individual Document Profiles 217
MISSING 217
Install
BarCode Component 241
Connector for TELEform 274
FaxServer Service for RightFAX 268
Modules Separately from Server 125
TargetFax for RightFAX 268
Installing Fax Boards on Two Computers
58
Installing Modules Separately from Server
324
TargetFax Administration and Installation Guide
125
Installing TargetFax Software, on Server
73
Installing the TargetFax Client for Terminal Services 127
ISA Fax Board Configuration 54
L
Licensing Modules 24, 80
Logging Information 27
Logon to Applications 34
Lookup Values 205
Loop Start Interface (LSI) 48
M
Mail Connector
Add the Mail Connector 173
Install MailServer Service for 172
Merge Own
Header/Forms 45
Overlay Fields 45
MergeMode Overlay Options 165
MissingCode 207
Multi-FaxServer Setup 45
Multi-Server Performance Tuning 45
N
Net Access Card, Installing the 110
NoCodes 207
Notification, Sending when No BarCodes
are Detected 235
Notifications
Default 42
Sent When No Bar Codes are Detected
235
WorkServer Alerts 42
Notify only if Fax Failed 178
Notify only if Sent OK 178
O
onfiguring 118
OTIS Work Service 82
Overlay File Name on Image 149
P
Package Priority 279
Pause for Reviewer 148
PDF to TIFF Conversion 159
PDF, save received faxes as 138
PDF2TIF Module
Default Settings 160
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
Importing 159
Personalized Inbound Directory Routing
143
Power User 34
Print to User’s Printer 178
Printer
Inbound Fax Routing to 136
R
Remove Background Halftone 247
Remove Blank Fax Lines 247
Remove Punch Holes 247
Repair Jobs Database 250
Resize Image to Page 248
RightFAX
Add the TargetFax Connector 268
Install the FaxServer Service for 268
Installing TargetFax for RightFAX 268
User Mailbox Polling 271
ROUTEO
ROUTEO 218
Routing
Channel 155
DID 153
DTMF 155
scanned or dropped files 164
Routing and Splitting Bar Coded Faxes 220
Routing Bar Coded Faxes 220
Routing Destinations
Inbound Routing to a Directory 138
Inbound Routing to a Printer 136
Inbound Routing to an E-mail address
138
Routing Files Saved to a Directory 166
Routing Instructions, Default 136
Run System Administrator 34
S
Saving to Custom Paths 141
Selecting the Directory to which Files are
Saved 140
Send Notification to User’s Email 178
Separating Documents within Fax Transmissions 177
Sfx
215
Signaling Type 60
Signature File, Creating a TIFF 39
325
Splitting Bar Coded Faxes 220
Splitting Faxes 177
Submit
RightFAX Configuration 271
Submit Scheduled Jobs 45
Supervisor 34
Symbologies 204
System AdmiinistrtorTopics 41
System Administrator
Data Sources 41
File menu 26
Toolbar 28
Tools Menu 27
System Defaults for Notifications 42
T
T1
Service Type 55
T1 Provisioning 55
T1 Signal Protocol 55
T1 Trunk Assignment 56
TargetFax Base Modules 20
TargetFax Codes for DFC Files 164
TargetFax Ftp Gateway Services
Billing Reports 309
TELEform
Auto Export Database 278
Configuration 280
Document/Package Routing 278
Queue Rule Information 274
Queues 274
Terminal Services, Installing TargetFax on
127
The Inbound Routing Copy To option 142
Third Party Connectors 21
This Manual, How to Use 5
Toolbar
Custom Rule 239
System Administrator 28
Topic, Default 42
TR1034
(PCI-X) Digital 52
Analog Series 50
DID 50
Digital Series 49
TR114
Analog Series 48
One Touch Global Technologies, Inc.
Digital Series 49
Dip Switches 51
Drivers for 62
TR114 and TruFax Analog, Brooktrout Fax
Board Preparation 52
TruFax
Analog Series 48
TypeSfx
215
U
Uninstalling TargetFax 294
Use Custom options 143
Use DocProfile 148
Use WorkFlow 148
User Groups 35
User Mailbox Polling for RightFAX 271
User Rights 33
V
View Events for All Users In Group 34
View User Profile 34
View/Edit Routing 34
Virus Protection Software 24
W
Windows 2003
Device Drivers 62
Directory Privileges 127
Windows Installation of BrookTrout
Boards 62
Wink-Start 60
WorkServer
Inbound Routing Defaults 44
WorkServer Inbound Routing Default 44
WorkServer Service
Alerts 42
WorkServer Service, Start the 82
326